Rohde & Schwarz RTE User Manual

page of 2078

/ 2078
Contents
Table of Contents
Bookmarks

Table of Contents

Quick Links

Download this manual

R&S

RTE

Oscilloscope

User Manual

(=J:P2)

1326103202

Version 20

Table of Contents

Chapters

Table of Contents

Need help?

Do you have a question about the RTE and is the answer not in the manual?

Questions and answers

Summary of Contents for Rohde & Schwarz RTE

Page 1 ® R&S Oscilloscope User Manual (=J:P2) 1326103202 Version 20...
Page 2 ® This manual describes the following R&S RTE models with firmware version 4.80: ● ® R&S RTE1022: 200 MHz, 2 channels (1326.2000K22 and 1317.2500K22) ● ® R&S RTE1024: 200 MHz, 4 channels (1326.2000K24 and 1317.2500K24) ● ® R&S RTE1032: 350 MHz, 2 channels (1326.2000K32 and 1317.2500K32) ●...
Page 3: Table Of Contents
® Contents R&S Contents 1 Safety and regulatory information............41 Safety instructions......................41 Labels on the product....................46 Warning messages in the documentation..............46 Korea certification class A..................47 2 Preface....................48 Key features.........................48 Documentation overview....................48 2.2.1 Manuals and instrument help..................49 2.2.2 Data sheet and brochure....................49 2.2.3 Release notes, open source acknowledgment.............
Page 4 ® Contents R&S 3.2.1 Front panel........................60 3.2.1.1 Input connectors......................61 3.2.1.2 Other front panel connectors..................62 3.2.2 Rear panel........................62 3.2.3 Keys and controls......................65 3.2.3.1 POWER key........................65 3.2.3.2 SETUP controls......................65 3.2.3.3 HORIZONTAL controls....................67 3.2.3.4 VERTICAL controls....................... 68 3.2.3.5 TRIGGER controls......................69 3.2.3.6 ANALYSIS keys......................70 3.2.3.7...
Page 5 ® Contents R&S 3.4.2 Touchscreen display....................107 3.4.2.1 Information on the display................... 107 3.4.2.2 Control elements on the touchscreen................110 3.4.3 App cockpit........................111 3.4.4 Working with waveforms....................112 3.4.5 Rohde & Schwarz smartgrid..................114 3.4.6 Using the signal bar.....................116 3.4.7 Toolbar.........................117 3.4.7.1 Using the toolbar......................118 3.4.7.2 Configuring the toolbar....................
Page 6 ® Contents R&S 4.4.2.2 Color tables......................... 146 4.4.2.3 Diagram layout......................147 4.4.2.4 Waveform labels......................150 4.4.2.5 Performance........................152 4.4.2.6 Clear results........................ 152 4.4.3 Adjusting the display....................153 4.4.3.1 Changing the diagram name..................153 4.4.3.2 Changing waveform colors..................153 4.4.3.3 Configuring the appearance of dialog and result boxes..........155 4.4.3.4 Using the signal bar....................
Page 7 ® Contents R&S 5.1.2.2 Acquisition settings..................... 170 5.1.2.3 Acquisition control....................... 170 5.1.3 Horizontal system......................171 5.1.3.1 Parameters of the horizontal system................171 5.1.3.2 Horizontal position.......................172 5.1.4 Probes.........................172 5.1.4.1 Voltage probes......................173 Passive voltage probes....................174 Active voltage probes - general...................174 Differential active probes.....................175 Horizontal settings....................176 5.2.1 Setup...........................176...
Page 8 ® Contents R&S 5.5.6 Setup for predefined probes..................209 5.5.7 Setup for current probes....................211 5.5.8 Setup for unknown probes..................214 5.5.9 Probe attributes......................215 5.5.10 Calibration results....................... 216 5.5.11 Probe adapter R&S RT‑Z2T..................216 R&S RT-ZVC probe....................217 5.6.1 R&S RT-ZVC overview....................218 5.6.1.1 Setup...........................218 5.6.1.2 Probes.........................221 5.6.1.3...
Page 9 ® Contents R&S Setting up the trigger....................239 6.2.1 Configuring a simple trigger..................239 6.2.2 Positioning the trigger....................240 6.2.3 Using holdoff....................... 240 Setting up an A → B → R trigger sequence..............241 6.2.4 Trigger types......................241 6.3.1 Basic trigger settings....................242 6.3.2 Edge..........................243 6.3.3 Glitch...........................
Page 10 ® Contents R&S 7 Waveform analysis................278 Zoom.......................... 278 7.1.1 Methods of zooming....................278 7.1.2 Zoom settings......................280 7.1.2.1 Zoom functions on the toolbar..................280 7.1.2.2 Start and stop settings....................281 7.1.2.3 Position and range settings..................282 7.1.3 Zooming for details......................284 Reference waveforms....................290 7.2.1 Working with reference waveforms................
Page 11 ® Contents R&S History........................312 7.4.1 About history....................... 312 7.4.2 History setup....................... 313 7.4.2.1 Viewer......................... 313 7.4.2.2 Information........................315 7.4.3 Using history....................... 316 XY-diagram........................ 318 7.5.1 Settings for XY-diagrams.....................318 7.5.2 Displaying an XY-diagram................... 320 8 Measurements..................322 Cursor measurements....................322 8.1.1 Cursors and results of cursor measurements.............
Page 12 Overview of histogram measurements................370 8.2.8.3 Creating histograms....................372 8.2.8.4 Histogram setup......................373 8.2.8.5 Settings for histogram measurement................375 8.2.9 Protocol measurements (option R&S RTE-K35)............376 8.2.9.1 Overview of protocol measurements................376 8.2.9.2 Settings for protocol measurements................377 8.2.10 Result analysis......................382 8.2.10.1 Statistics........................382...
Page 13 FFT overlap.........................409 9.1.3.3 FFT gating........................410 9.1.3.4 Peak list........................413 9.1.3.5 FFT Y-Units......................... 413 9.1.3.6 FFT coupling....................... 416 Spectrum Analysis (option R&S RTE-K18).............417 9.2.1 Spectrogram display....................417 9.2.2 Spectrum Analysis functions..................418 9.2.3 Configuring spectrograms................... 419 9.2.4 Spectrogram configuration settings................420 10 Mask testing..................422 10.1...
Page 14 ® Contents R&S 10.2.2.2 Mask definition: waveform mask................. 429 10.2.3 Event actions /Reset....................432 10.2.4 Mask display....................... 435 10.3 Working with masks....................436 10.3.1 Setting up user masks....................436 10.3.1.1 Creating user masks....................436 10.3.1.2 Modifying user masks....................437 10.3.2 Setting up a mask test....................440 10.3.3 Configuring the mask and hit display................
Page 15 ® Contents R&S 11.3.1 Gate settings....................... 461 11.3.2 Defining the search gate..................... 463 11.4 Result presentation....................463 11.4.1 Result presentation settings..................463 11.4.2 Configuring the search results presentation..............466 11.5 Noise reject........................467 11.5.1 Noise reject settings....................467 11.5.2 Defining noise rejection for searches................468 12 Data and file management..............469 12.1 Save and recall user settings...................469...
Page 16 C label list......................... 531 13.2.5 I²C decode results....................... 533 13.2.6 Search on decoded I²C data..................535 13.2.6.1 I²C search setup......................536 13.2.6.2 I²C search results......................538 13.3 SPI bus (option R&S RTE-K1).................. 539 13.3.1 The SPI protocol......................539 User Manual 1326.1032.02 ─ 20...
Page 17 UART trigger settings....................556 13.4.3.2 Triggering on UART signals..................558 13.4.4 UART decode results....................558 13.5 CAN and CAN FD (option R&S RTE-K3/K9)............560 13.5.1 The CAN protocol......................561 13.5.2 CAN and CAN FD configuration..................561 13.5.2.1 CAN and CAN FD configuration settings..............561 13.5.3...
Page 18 LIN decode results.......................611 13.6.6 Search on decoded LIN data..................614 13.6.6.1 LIN search setup......................614 13.6.6.2 LIN search results....................... 617 13.7 FlexRay (option R&S RTE-K4)................. 617 13.7.1 FlexRay configuration....................618 13.7.1.1 FlexRay configuration....................618 13.7.1.2 Configuring FlexRay protocol..................621 13.7.2 FlexRay trigger......................622 13.7.2.1...
Page 19 Triggering on MIL-STD-1553..................670 13.9.4 MIL-STD-1553 label list....................670 13.9.5 MIL-STD-1553 decode results..................671 13.9.6 Search on decoded MIL data..................673 13.9.6.1 MIL search setup......................673 13.9.6.2 MIL search results.......................676 13.10 ARINC 429 (option R&S RTE-K7)................678 13.10.1 ARINC 429 basics.......................678 User Manual 1326.1032.02 ─ 20...
Page 20 ARINC 429 decode results..................686 13.10.6 Search on decoded ARINC 429 data................688 13.10.6.1 ARINC 429 search setup.................... 688 13.10.6.2 ARINC search results....................690 13.11 Ethernet 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX (option R&S RTE-K8)........ 691 13.11.1 The Ethernet protocol....................691 13.11.2 Ethernet configuration....................692 13.11.2.1 Ethernet configuration settings..................692 13.11.2.2 Ethernet display settings.....................
Page 21 Search on decoded SENT data.................. 759 13.13.6.1 SENT search setup..................... 759 13.13.6.2 SENT search results....................765 13.14 Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTE-K50)M..........766 13.14.1 Custom: Manchester / NRZ protocols................. 766 13.14.1.1 Special features of Manchester coding............... 767 13.14.2 Custom: Manchester / NRZ configuration..............
Page 22 13.14.6.1 Custom Manchester / NRZ search setup..............799 13.14.6.2 Custom serial bus search results................800 13.14.6.3 Searching custom serial bus data................800 13.15 MDIO (option R&S RTE-K55)..................801 13.15.1 The MDIO protocol......................801 13.15.2 MDIO configuration..................... 803 13.15.2.1 MDIO configuration settings..................803 13.15.2.2 MDIO display settings....................
Page 23 Search on decoded USBPD data................859 13.17.5.1 USBPD search setup....................859 13.17.5.2 USBPD search results....................860 13.17.5.3 Searching USBPD data....................862 13.18 SpaceWire (option R&S RTE-K65)................863 13.18.1 SpaceWire basics....................... 863 13.18.2 SpaceWire configuration..................... 864 13.18.2.1 SpaceWire configuration settings................864 13.18.2.2 Display settings......................866 13.18.2.3...
Page 24 13.19.4.2 Search results......................893 13.19.4.3 Searching CXPI data....................894 13.19.5 CXPI decode results....................894 14 Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTE-B1)........898 14.1 Digital channels and parallel buses................ 898 14.1.1 Parallel buses - configuration..................899 14.1.2 Parallel buses - digital probes..................904 14.1.3...
Page 25 Triggering on digital signals and parallel buses............920 14.4 Measurements on digital channels................. 921 14.5 Data export........................ 921 14.6 Mathematics......................922 14.7 Search........................923 15 Waveform generator (Option R&S RTE-B6)........924 15.1 Setup of the waveform generator................924 15.1.1 General settings......................925 15.1.2 Function generator...................... 926 15.1.3 Modulation........................930 15.1.3.1...
Page 26 Configuring a sweep waveform...................951 15.4.4 Configuring an arbitrary waveform................951 15.4.5 Configuring a pattern generator waveform..............952 15.5 DC offset alignment....................952 16 Power analysis (option R&S RTE-K31)..........954 16.1 Power measurement selection................954 16.1.1 General settings......................955 16.1.1.1 Auto deskew........................955 Probes.........................956...
Page 27 ® Contents R&S 16.4 Control loop.......................980 16.4.1 Modulation analysis.....................980 16.4.1.1 Modulation analysis results..................981 16.4.1.2 Configuring modulation analysis................. 982 16.4.1.3 Modulation analysis settings..................983 16.4.2 Dynamic on resistance....................984 16.4.2.1 Dynamic on resistance results..................984 16.4.2.2 Configuring dynamic on resistance................985 16.4.2.3 Dynamic on resistance settings..................
Page 28 Assigning the IP address..................1028 17.2.3 Using computer names..................... 1029 17.2.4 Changing the windows firewall settings..............1031 17.3 Web interface......................1032 17.3.1 Settings on the R&S RTE..................1032 17.3.2 Web browser......................1034 17.3.2.1 LAN configuration......................1035 IP configuration......................1035 Advanced config......................1036 Ping client........................1036 17.3.2.2...
Page 29 ® Contents R&S 17.5.1 Remote control interfaces and protocols..............1041 17.5.1.1 LAN interface......................1041 17.5.1.2 GPIB interface (IEC/IEEE bus interface)..............1042 17.5.2 Remote settings......................1043 17.5.2.1 GPIB settings......................1043 17.5.2.2 Remote settings......................1044 17.5.3 Starting and stopping remote control................ 1045 17.5.3.1 Starting a remote control session................1045 17.5.3.2 Using the display during remote control..............1045 17.5.3.3...
Page 30 Exporting and reconstructing multiple raw acquisitions of the history file....1066 18.3.5.3 Exporting measurement results to file...............1067 18.3.6 Protocol analysis....................... 1068 18.3.6.1 SENT (option R&S RTE-K10)................... 1068 Configuring SENT bus....................1068 Triggering on SENT bus....................1068 Searching SENT data....................1069 18.3.7 Power analysis (option R&S RTE-K31)..............1070 18.3.7.1...
Page 31 ® Contents R&S 18.4.5 Event parameter......................1075 18.4.6 Bit pattern parameter....................1076 18.5 Common commands....................1076 18.6 General remote settings..................1081 18.7 Instrument setup..................... 1085 18.7.1 System setup......................1085 18.7.2 Display settings......................1089 18.7.2.1 Signal colors / persistence..................1090 18.7.2.2 Color tables....................... 1092 18.7.2.3 Smartgrid........................1094 18.7.2.4...
Page 32 ® Contents R&S 18.8.8.2 Resolution and data....................1155 18.8.9 Differential signals..................... 1157 18.8.10 Digital filter.........................1160 18.8.11 Skew..........................1161 18.8.12 High definition mode....................1162 18.8.13 Reference clock......................1163 18.9 Trigger........................1164 18.9.1 Basic trigger settings....................1165 18.9.2 Edge trigger....................... 1168 18.9.3 Glitch trigger......................1171 18.9.4 Width trigger......................
Page 33 ® Contents R&S 18.10.2.2 Scaling........................1222 18.10.2.3 Waveform data export....................1224 18.10.2.4 Import of multichannel waveform data..............1225 18.10.3 Mathematics......................1227 18.10.4 History........................1231 18.10.5 XY-Diagram....................... 1235 18.11 Cursor measurements.................... 1238 18.11.1 Cursor setup......................1238 18.11.2 Cursor results......................1245 18.11.3 Peak search using cursors..................1247 18.12 Automatic measurements..................
Page 34 ® Contents R&S 18.13.3 Spectrum Analysis (option R&S RTE-K18)............... 1329 18.14 Mask testing......................1331 18.14.1 Mask test definition....................1331 18.14.2 Mask definition: user mask..................1335 18.14.3 Mask definition: waveform mask................1341 18.14.4 Event actions......................1343 18.14.5 Mask display......................1346 18.14.6 Results........................1349 18.15...
Page 35 18.16.11 Reports........................1417 18.17 Protocols........................1419 18.17.1 Configuration settings for all serial protocols............1420 18.17.2 Trigger settings for all serial protocols...............1424 18.17.3 I²C (option R&S RTE-K1)..................1426 18.17.3.1 Configuration......................1426 18.17.3.2 Trigger........................1428 18.17.3.3 Decode results......................1434 18.17.3.4 I²C search settings....................1443 18.17.3.5 I²C search results......................
Page 36 ARINC 429 (option R&S RTE-K7)................1632 18.17.11.1 Configuration......................1632 18.17.11.2 Trigger........................1635 18.17.11.3 Decode results......................1639 18.17.11.4 Search settings......................1642 18.17.11.5 Search results......................1645 18.17.12 Ethernet 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX (option R&S RTE-K8)........1648 18.17.12.1 Configuration......................1648 18.17.12.2 Trigger........................1651 User Manual 1326.1032.02 ─ 20...
Page 37 Configuration......................1702 18.17.14.2 Trigger........................1706 18.17.14.3 Decode results......................1712 18.17.14.4 SENT search settings....................1719 18.17.14.5 SENT search results....................1727 18.17.15 Custom: manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTE-K50)..........1732 18.17.15.1 Configuration......................1732 18.17.15.2 Trigger........................1748 18.17.15.3 Filter.......................... 1754 18.17.15.4 Decode results......................1758 18.17.15.5 Search settings......................
Page 38 Trigger........................1876 18.17.20.3 Decode results......................1885 18.17.20.4 Search settings......................1888 18.17.20.5 Search result settings....................1897 18.18 Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTE-B1)............. 1900 18.18.1 Digital channels......................1900 18.18.2 Parallel bus configuration..................1903 18.18.3 Digital resolution......................1910 18.18.4 Trigger settings for digital signals and parallel buses..........1911 18.18.4.1...
Page 39 ® Contents R&S 18.19 Waveform generator (option R&S RTE-B6)............1923 18.19.1 Waveform generator setup..................1923 18.19.1.1 General........................1923 18.19.1.2 Function generator....................1924 18.19.1.3 Modulation.........................1926 18.19.1.4 Sweep........................1932 18.19.1.5 ARB...........................1932 18.19.2 Pattern generator setup.................... 1936 18.19.3 Output setup......................1937 18.19.4 Noise setup....................... 1939 18.19.5...
Page 40 File menu......................... 2001 Horizontal menu...................... 2002 Trigger menu......................2002 Vertical menu......................2002 Math menu....................... 2003 Cursor menu......................2003 Meas menu.......................2004 Masks menu......................2004 Analysis menu......................2004 A.10 Display menu......................2005 A.11 Wavegen menu (with option R&S RTE-B6)............2006 List of commands................2007 Index....................2066 User Manual 1326.1032.02 ─ 20...
Page 41: Safety And Regulatory Information
41. Intended use The R&S RTE oscilloscope is designed for measurements on circuits that are only indi- rectly connected to the mains or not connected at all. It is not rated for any measure- ment category. The product is intended for the development, production and verification of electronic components and devices in industrial, administrative, and laboratory environments.
Page 42 ® Safety and regulatory information R&S Safety instructions In these safety instructions, the term "product" covers instruments (oscilloscopes), probes and their accessories. Lifting and carrying the instrument Check the data sheet for the maximum weight of the instrument. A single person can only carry a maximum of 18 kg safely depending on age, gender and physical condi- tion.
Page 43 ® Safety and regulatory information R&S Safety instructions ment such as household appliances and similar loads. Be aware that electrically pow- ered products have risks, such as electric shock, fire, personal injury or even death. Take the following measures for your safety: ●...
Page 44 ® Safety and regulatory information R&S Safety instructions ● When working with high voltages and current probes, observe the additional oper- ating conditions specified in this safety instructions. ● The probe pins are extremely pointed and can easily penetrate clothes and the skin.
Page 45 ® Safety and regulatory information R&S Safety instructions Measurement categories IEC 61010-2-030 defines measurement categories that rate instruments on their ability to resist short transient overvoltages that occur in addition to the working voltage. Use the measurement setup only in electrical environments for which they are rated. ●...
Page 46: Labels On The Product
® Safety and regulatory information R&S Warning messages in the documentation Potential hazard Read the product documentation to avoid personal injury or product damage. Electrical hazard Indicates live parts. Risk of electric shock, fire, personal injury or even death. Protective conductor terminal Connect this terminal to a grounded external conductor or to protective ground.
Page 47: Korea Certification Class A
® Safety and regulatory information R&S Korea certification class A NOTICE Potential risks of damage. Could result in damage to the supported product or to other property. 1.4 Korea certification class A 이 기기는 업무용(A급) 전자파 적합기기로서 판매자 또는 사용자는 이 점을 주의하시기 바라며, 가정외의...
Page 48: Preface
● High-quality line of probes For a detailed specification refer to the data sheet. The R&S RTE oscilloscope brings various benefits in your daily work: ● Find rare signal faults quickly with no trade-offs for measurement and analysis due to highest acquisition rate and shortest blind time.
Page 49: Manuals And Instrument Help
Getting started manual Introduces the R&S RTE and describes how to set up and start working with the instru- ment, and describes basic operations. A printed English version is included in the delivery. Editions in other languages are available on the product website.
Page 50: Release Notes, Open Source Acknowledgment
It can also be read directly on the instrument. See www.rohde-schwarz.com/firmware/rte. 2.2.4 Application notes, application cards, videos These documents deal with special applications or background information on particu- lar topics.
Page 51: Conventions Used In The Documentation
® Preface R&S Conventions used in the documentation Type Designation Order No. for 1326.2000.xx / 1317.2500.xx instru- ments R&S RTE-K10 SENT serial triggering and decoding 1326.1603.02 / 1326.1532.02 R&S RTE-K18 Spectrum Analysis 1326.3006.02 / 1326.3035.02 R&S RTE-K31 Power analysis 1326.1278.02 / 1317.7177.02...
Page 52: Conventions For Procedure Descriptions
® Preface R&S Conventions used in the documentation Convention Description Links Links that you can click are displayed in blue font. "References" References to other parts of the documentation are enclosed by quota- tion marks. 2.4.2 Conventions for procedure descriptions When operating the instrument, several alternative methods may be available to per- form the same task.
Page 53: Getting Started
® Getting started R&S Preparing for use 3 Getting started Note: the following chapters are identical to those in the R&S RTE Getting Started manual. ● Preparing for use.....................53 ● Instrument tour......................60 ● Trying out the instrument..................73 ●...
Page 54: Setting Up The Product
® Getting started R&S Preparing for use – Residential environments – Environments that are directly connected to a low-voltage supply network that supplies residential buildings ● Class A equipment is intended for use in industrial environments. It can cause radio disturbances in residential environments due to possible conducted and radi- ated disturbances.
Page 55: Mounting The Product In A Rack
Design and implement an efficient ventilation concept for the rack. To mount the R&S RTE in a rack 1. Use an adapter kit that fits the dimensions of the R&S RTE to prepare the instru- ment for rack mounting. For information on the dimensions, see data sheet.
Page 56: Connecting To Power
3.1.6 Connecting to power For safety information, see "Connecting to power and grounding" on page 42. The R&S RTE can be used with different AC power voltages and adapts itself automat- ically to it. The nominal ranges are: ● 100 V to 240 V AC at 50 Hz to 60 Hz and 400 Hz, with maximal 10% voltage fluctu- ation on line ●...
Page 57: Switching On Or Off
2. Press the [POWER] key on the front panel. The instrument performs a system check, boots the operating system, and then starts the R&S RTE firmware. The [POWER] key turns green and the illuminated keys on the front panel light up.
Page 58: Connecting External Devices
The properties of external USB devices are configured in the operating system, not in the R&S RTE software. It is recommended that you use mouse and keyboard to access and modify the settings of the Windows operating system.
Page 59: Connecting An External Monitor
3. Select "Printers & scanners". 4. Select "Add a printer or scanner". 3.1.8.2 Connecting an external monitor You can connect an external monitor or projector to the R&S RTE. The following con- nectors are available: ● "MONITOR (DVI-D)" on page 64 Before connecting an external monitor, ensure that the monitor and the R&S RTE are...
Page 60: Instrument Tour
To show the instrument's display content on both the oscilloscope and the external monitor, select "Duplicate". The touchscreen of the R&S RTE has a screen resolution of 1024 x 768 pixel. Many external monitors have a higher screen resolution. If the screen resolution of the moni- tor is set higher than the instrument's resolution, the application window uses a 1024 x 768 area of the monitor display.
Page 61: Input Connectors
12 = External trigger input 3.2.1.1 Input connectors The R&S RTE has two or four channel inputs to connect the input signals, and an external trigger input to control the measurement by an external signal. User Manual 1326.1032.02 ─ 20...
Page 62: Other Front Panel Connectors
DUT and test fixtures, and wrist strap. Square wave signal for probe compensation, 1 kHz and 1 V Ground connector for probes. 3.2.2 Rear panel Figure 3-2 shows the rear panel of the R&S RTE with its connectors. User Manual 1326.1032.02 ─ 20...
Page 63 6 = External trigger output 7 = Reference input/output 8 = Slot for hardware option: mixed signal option R&S RTE-B1 (shown in picture), or waveform generator R&S RTE-B6, or GPIB connector R&S RTE-B10) 9 = Kensington lock slot to secure the instrument against theft...
Page 64 When a trigger occurs, the R&S RTE creates a pulse of 5 V with a source impedance of 50 Ω and delivers it to the external trigger output. The instrument can also send the pulse on mask test violation or violation of measurement limits and margins.
Page 65: Keys And Controls
500 mV (V ) is 400 MHz. For detailed specifications, refer to the data sheet. Waveform generator option R&S RTE-B6 The waveform generator generates various function and arbitrary waveforms, sweeps, and parallel patterns. For detailed specifications, refer to the data sheet.
Page 66 ® Getting started R&S Instrument tour [FILE] Opens and closes the "File" dialog box, where you can: ● Save instrument settings (user settings) ● Load instrument settings which were saved before ● Save waveform data and measurement results ● Define a naming pattern for autonaming of files [SETUP] Opens and closes the "Setup"...
Page 67: Horizontal Controls
® Getting started R&S Instrument tour 3.2.3.3 HORIZONTAL controls The keys and rotary knobs in the HORIZONTAL functional block adjust the acquisition settings and horizontal parameters. These settings are effective for all channel wave- forms. [RES REC LEN], [HORIZONTAL] Open and close the "Setup" tab in the "Horizontal" dialog box, where you can: ●...
Page 68: Vertical Controls
® Getting started R&S Instrument tour "Reference point" defines the position of the reference point on the screen. Turn clock- wise to move it to the right. The reference point marks the rescaling center of the time scale. It is indicated by a gray triangle outline at the top of the diagram. If you modify the time scale, the reference point remains fixed on the screen, and the scale is stretched or compressed to both sides of the reference point.
Page 69: Trigger Controls
® Getting started R&S Instrument tour [MATH] Opens the "Math" dialog box, where you can configure the calculation of mathematical waveforms using various mathematic operations on other waveforms. Press the key repeatedly to switch the math waveform. If a math waveform is selected, the vertical rotary knobs are illuminated in brown (default color), the brightness of the color depends on the selected waveform.
Page 70: Analysis Keys
® Getting started R&S Instrument tour [LEVELS] The rotary knob sets the trigger level for all trigger types. Turn clockwise to move up the trigger level. If the selected trigger type requires two trigger levels - upper and lower level - press the knob to toggle between the two levels. [SOURCE] Opens a dialog box where you can select the trigger source.
Page 71 ® Getting started R&S Instrument tour In the "Cursors" dialog box, you can: ● Configure up to 2 cursor sets ● Define style and labels of the cursors ● Connect the cursor to the waveform and couple the cursors [MEAS] Starts the default automatic measurement for the active waveform and opens the "Measurement"...
Page 72: Navigation Controls
® Getting started R&S Instrument tour [HISTORY] The sample memory contains several stored acquisitions before the current one, which is shown in the display. Press the key to open the quick access "History" dialog box, where you can view the stored acquisitions and use them for further analysis. Press the key again to open the main "History"...
Page 73: Trying Out The Instrument
In dialog boxes, for option buttons in a row: select an option. 3.3 Trying out the instrument This chapter introduces the most important functions and settings of the R&S RTE step by step. The complete description of the functionality and its usage is given in the "User Manual".
Page 74: Displaying A Basic Signal
3.3.1 Displaying a basic signal Displaying the input from a signal channel is simple and straightforward. Furthermore, you get to know some basic trigger functions. The R&S RTE provides wide-ranging trigger functions to find various signal anomalies, which are described in the instrument help and in the "User Manual".
Page 75 ® Getting started R&S Trying out the instrument 4. If necessary, compensate the passive probe as described in Chapter 5.10.1, "Adjusting passive probes", on page 234. 5. In the [TRIGGER] area of the front panel, press the [SOURCE] key. Press the key again to switch the trigger source to "C2".
Page 76: Acquiring Data
® Getting started R&S Trying out the instrument 3.3.2 Acquiring data You can acquire data using different arithmetic methods to get envelope or average waveforms. If you need to change only one setting during analysis, and you need to change it often, you can reduce the dialog box to a small box that only contains the required set- ting.
Page 77: Changing The Waveform Scaling And Position
® Getting started R&S Trying out the instrument 3.3.3 Changing the waveform scaling and position As you can see on the y-axis of the display, the calibration signal has a vertical offset of about 500 mV. The value can differ. This value is also indicated in the signal icon for channel1 (3rd row).
Page 78 ® Getting started R&S Trying out the instrument 3. To move the waveform back to the center of the screen, eliminate the offset in the vertical settings: a) Press the [Ch1] key again. b) Enter 0 V in the "Offset" field. The waveform is now displayed in the center of the display, with the x-axis crossing at 0 V.
Page 79 ® Getting started R&S Trying out the instrument 5. Tap the "Find level" icon on the toolbar. The instrument adjusts the trigger level, and a stable waveform is displayed. User Manual 1326.1032.02 ─ 20...
Page 80 ® Getting started R&S Trying out the instrument 6. To examine one pulse in the signal in more detail, turn the horizontal "Scale" rotary knob. The current scale factor per division is displayed in the upper left-hand corner of the display while you turn the knob. You can switch between a small and large step size in the scaling factor by tapping the step icon.
Page 81: Zooming Into The Display
® Getting started R&S Trying out the instrument 7. To return to the original scaling, try the [UNDO] key in the [NAVIGATION] area: a) Press the [UNDO] key repeatedly until the original scaling is displayed. b) Press the [REDO] key to retrace the undone steps. Thus, you can toggle between the two displays using the undo and redo keys until you perform a dif- ferent action.
Page 82: Using The Standard Zoom
® Getting started R&S Trying out the instrument one of the zoom functions. The instrument has 4 zoom types, 2 of them you try out in this chapter. 3.3.4.1 Using the standard zoom 1. Restore the default signal channel settings by pressing the [PRESET] and [AUTOSET] keys.
Page 83: Using The Fingertip Zoom
® Getting started R&S Trying out the instrument 4. To remove the zoom window and make room on the display for other results, tap the "Delete" icon and then the zoom window. 3.3.4.2 Using the fingertip zoom 1. Touch the "Zoom" icon on the toolbar and drag it down until the "Zoom" toolbar menu opens.
Page 84: Displaying The Waveform History
® Getting started R&S Trying out the instrument Tip: You can turn the NAVIGATION knob to change the zoom factor while holding the waveform. 4. Release the finger when the waveform segment of interest is visible in the zoom. 5. Tap "Keep" to convert the fingertip zoom into a standard zoom diagram. 3.3.5 Displaying the waveform history During a continuous acquisition, the instrument stores the acquired data in the memory and shows the current acquisition on the display.
Page 85 ® Getting started R&S Trying out the instrument 10 waveform acquisitions are performed. The most recent acquisition is displayed in the diagram. 5. In the [ANALYSIS] area, press the [HISTORY] key. The quick access "History" dialog box appears, and the history mode is on. 6.
Page 86: Showing Basic Measurement Results
Getting started R&S Trying out the instrument 3.3.6 Showing basic measurement results Using the R&S RTE you can perform and display different measurements simultane- ously. The color of the results in the result table corresponds with the source waveform color. 3.3.6.1 Performing a cursor measurement 1.
Page 87: Performing Automatic Amplitude Measurements
® Getting started R&S Trying out the instrument 5. To save space in the display, minimize the result box. The most important results are displayed and updated in the result icon, as well. 6. To remove the result icon and make room on the display for other results, tap the red cross on the icon label.
Page 88 ® Getting started R&S Trying out the instrument By default, the measurement of the high signal level is started. 3. Tap the "Automatic measurement" icon again. Then tap the waveform. By default, the measurement of the low signal level is started. 4.
Page 89: Performing And Configuring The Quick Measurement
® Getting started R&S Trying out the instrument 11. Close the "Measurements" dialog box and check the results. 12. To see all results, drag up the border of the results tab. 13. Close the "Measurement Results" box. 3.3.6.3 Performing and configuring the quick measurement A set of up to eight different measurements on one source can be performed at once, simply by tapping the "Quick measurement"...
Page 90 ® Getting started R&S Trying out the instrument 4. Tap the icon to open the "Measurements" dialog box. 5. Select the "Quick Meas" "Setup". 6. Scroll down in the table and disable the Mean and RMS measurements. 7. Tap "Activate" and select Period. Now the result box also shows the result of the period measurement.
Page 91: Displaying A Histogram
® Getting started R&S Trying out the instrument 3.3.6.4 Displaying a histogram Histograms are useful to analyze the occurrence of measurement values statistically. 1. Tap the "Histogram" icon on the toolbar. 2. Tap the diagram in which you want to generate the histogram. You can also draw a rectangle on the screen to define the area on which the histo- gram is based.
Page 92 ® Getting started R&S Trying out the instrument 3. To display the measurement results for the histogram, tap the "Measurement" icon on the toolbar. 4. Tap the histogram. The waveform count for the histogram is displayed. 5. To get more measurement results for the histogram, double-tap the results. Alternatively, you can press the [MEAS] key on the front panel.
Page 93: Performing A Basic Fft Analysis
® Getting started R&S Trying out the instrument 3.3.7 Performing a basic FFT analysis During FFT analysis, a signal in the time domain is converted to a spectrum of frequen- cies. A basic spectrum waveform can be displayed quickly. 1. Restore the default signal channel settings by pressing the [AUTOSET] key. 2.
Page 94 ® Getting started R&S Trying out the instrument The channel power is displayed below the FFT diagram. 5. Double-tap the spectrum waveform. The "FFT Setup" dialog box opens. 6. Set the "Center frequency" to 10 kHz. The instrument adjusts the frequency span automatically. Close the dialog box.
Page 95: Performing Mathematical Calculations
® Getting started R&S Trying out the instrument 7. To remove the FFT results, tap the "Delete" icon and then the spectrum waveform. 8. Close the "Measurement" results. 3.3.8 Performing mathematical calculations In addition to the measured waveforms, you can display calculated data to compare the current measurement result with.
Page 96: Performing A Search
® Getting started R&S Trying out the instrument 7. Under "b", enter the vertical position offset, e.g. 2. Look at the lower part of the dialog box and note that the instrument adjusts the "Vertical scale" and "Vertical offset" of the math waveform automatically. 8.
Page 97 ® Getting started R&S Trying out the instrument 1. Press the [SEARCH] key on the front panel (ANALYSIS area). 2. Select "C1" as "Source". 3. Select the search criteria: Enable "Window". 4. In the "Window" tab below, define the search conditions: a) In the "Upper level"...
Page 98: Performing A Mask Test
® Getting started R&S Trying out the instrument 8. In the results table, tap the row of the search result that you want to display in the search zoom diagram. 3.3.10 Performing a mask test In the following example, you perform a mask test to determine whether the signal exceeds a rectangular area.
Page 99 ® Getting started R&S Trying out the instrument 4. To define the further mask test settings, press the [MASKS] key on the front panel (in the [ANALYSIS] area), and select the "Mask Definition" tab. 5. If necessary, correct the mask segment points you defined graphically in the "Mask Definition"...
Page 100 ® Getting started R&S Trying out the instrument 7. Select the "Test Definition" tab. 8. Select channel 1 as the "Source". 9. Define the number of tolerable sample hits in the "Tolerance" field. A test has failed if the number of sample hits exceeds the limit of "Violation toler- ance"...
Page 101: Printing And Saving Screenshots
® Getting started R&S Trying out the instrument 12. Press [RUN CONT] to start the next acquisition and watch the screen. 13. Close the "MaskTest" results box by tapping the red cross in the label. 3.3.11 Printing and saving screenshots You can print and save screenshots of the current display to document your results.
Page 102 ® Getting started R&S Trying out the instrument 4. Tap the upper left button and select the printer. 5. Tap "Print". The result is a monochrome image. 6. Close the dialog box. To configure the PRINT key 1. Open the "File" menu and tap "Frontpanel Setup". 2.
Page 103: Saving Data
6. Open the ScreenShots folder. 3.3.12 Saving data After a measurement with the R&S RTE, you can save the resulting waveform data for further evaluation or comparison. You can also save measurement results, and device settings to repeat or restore previous measurements.
Page 104 ® Getting started R&S Trying out the instrument 8. Enter Waveform1 on the online keyboard. 9. Tap "ENTER" to close the online keyboard. 10. Select the file type: "*.bin". 11. Tap "Save". The waveform data is saved to the files Waveform1.Wfm.bin and Waveform1.bin in the selected directory.
Page 105: Operating The Instrument
The device and measurement settings are restored and you can repeat the mea- surement. 3.4 Operating the instrument There are three ways to operate the R&S RTE. Manual operation Use the touchscreen, keys and rotary knobs, or an optional mouse and/or keyboard.
Page 106: Means Of Manual Interaction
For details, refer to the user manual, chapter "Web Control". Alternatively, you can use Virtual Network Computing (VNC), which requires installation of the VNC server on the R&S RTE. Installation and configuration are described in the application note "Remote Monitoring and Control of the R&S RTE with a Web Browser", available on the Rohde &...
Page 107: Touchscreen Display
® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument 3.4.2 Touchscreen display 3.4.2.1 Information on the display The touchscreen of the instrument shows the waveforms and measurement results, and also information and everything that you need to control the instrument. All wave- form-related display elements are shown in Figure 3-3.
Page 108 ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument Diagram (1) A diagram shows one or more waveforms: channel, reference, and math waveforms together with histograms, masks etc. Zoom details, XY-waveforms, spectra and other special waveforms are shown in separate diagrams. By default, the diagram name contains the diagram number and the short names of the waveforms shown inside.
Page 109 ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument Figure 3-3, the signal icons Ch1 and Ch2 show the main settings, and the wave- forms are displayed in diagrams. All other waveforms are minimized and shown in the signal icon. Figure 3-5: Signal label on the signal bar 1 = Vertical scale 2 = Vertical position 3 = Offset...
Page 110: Control Elements On The Touchscreen
® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument Histogram and histogram area (9, 10) A histogram shows the frequency of occurrence of voltage or time values in a bar chart directly in the diagram. The rectangular histogram area indicates the part of the wave- form that is considered in the histogram.
Page 111: App Cockpit
"Signal bar (3)" on page 108. Menu bar (3) The menus provide access to the complete functionality of R&S RTE. Result box (4) If you perform cursor or automatic measurements, mask testing, or a search, the result box shows the results of the action. The position of the result box is adjustable. It can be docked (default for measurements), floating, minimized to a result icon on the signal bar, or displayed in a separate diagram on the screen.
Page 112: Working With Waveforms
® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument 3.4.4 Working with waveforms The R&S RTE can create and display many waveform types. The most importand are: ● Channel waveforms: For each input channel, one channel waveform is shown. ● Reference waveforms: Four waveforms can be used as reference for comparison and analysis.
Page 113 ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument ● Waveforms can be minimized to signal icons showing a small real-time signal view. Thus, more space in the diagram area is available without switching off waveforms. ● Diagrams are displayed on tabs – you can arrange them side by side or one above the other.
Page 114: Rohde & Schwarz Smartgrid
® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument ● Tap the signal icon. Note: Zoom waveforms in zoom diagrams cannot be selected. To minimize a waveform ► Choose on of the following ways: ● Tap the "Minimize" icon in the upper right corner of the waveform's signal label in the signal bar.
Page 115 ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument Figure 3-7: SmartGrid positions 1 = In the existing diagram, overlay of signal 2 = New diagram on the left or right 3 = New diagram above or below 4 = New diagram on top of the existing diagram 5 = XY-diagram 6 = YX-diagram The diagram configuration is deleted when you use [PRESET] and *RST.
Page 116: Using The Signal Bar
® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument 3. To change the size of the new diagram, drag its edge to the required position. Remote commands: see Chapter 18.7.2.3, "Smartgrid", on page 1094. 3.4.6 Using the signal bar The signal bar can hold a large number of signal and result icons. Signal icons repre- sent the waveforms, serial buses and parallel buses, while result icons are minimized result boxes showing measurement and search results.
Page 117: Toolbar
® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument To change the position of the signal bar ► Touch the "Horizontal" label on the top of the signal bar and drag it to the opposite side of the screen. To configure auto-hide The signal bar can be hidden if the displayed information has not changed for a defined time, and is displayed again automatically when a setting in the signal bar changes.
Page 118: Using The Toolbar
® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument A little triangle in the lower right corner of the icon means, that a menu is available where you can select the required function. By default, the toolbar shows the most frequently used functions. You can configure the content of the toolbar and hide the date/time display, see Chapter 3.4.7.2, "Configuring toolbar",...
Page 119: Configuring The Toolbar
® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument 3.4.7.2 Configuring the toolbar You can configure the contents of the toolbar so that only the required functions are displayed. Furthermore, date and time can be hidden. The toolbar configuration is part of the user preferences. It is retained when you switch off and on the instrument, and you can save it in the user preferences and user-defined preset.
Page 120 Run / Stop and Run Single Label Find Trigger Level Update Ref Waveform Force Trigger Save Waveform Spectrogram (option R&S RTE-K18) You can configure the content of the toolbar and hide the date/time display, see Chap- ter 3.4.7.2, "Configuring the toolbar", on page 119.
Page 121 ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument Zoom The zoom icon on the toolbar shows the last selected zoom type. A short tap on the icon activates the selected zoom. If you touch the icon and drag your finger down, a menu opens where you can select another zoom type.
Page 122 ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument Masktest Starts the on-screen mask definition and the testing against the defined mask. Tap the icon and then tap the points that build the mask. Double-tap the last point to finish mask definition. To create a rectangular mask, draw a rectangle on the screen. You can move the mask on the screen.
Page 123 ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument Save Settings Saves the current instrument settings in a saveset. The filename is created according to the autonaming pattern. You can reload the saveset using the "Load saveset (Graphical recall)" toolbar icon, or using [FILE] > "Save/Recall" > "Settings". Save Screenshot Saves a screenshot of the current display using the settings defined in "File"...
Page 124: Displaying Results
Tap the icon and then tap the waveform to be exported. If you tap the display back- ground, the selected waveform is exported, or a multichannel export is performed if configured. Spectrogram (option R&S RTE-K18) Starts an FFT and the spectrogram. The FFT trace and the spectrogram are shown in separate diagrams.
Page 125 ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument 1 = Floating result box 2 = Table in a tab on the left or right 3 = Table in a tab above or below 4 = New tab To open the corresponding setup dialog box ►...
Page 126: Using Dialog Boxes
® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument 3. Under "Result box", select the "Result position": ● "Preview": result icon on the signal bar ● "Floating": floating result box in front of the diagrams To adjust the font size in result boxes 1.
Page 127: Entering Data
® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument To minimize a dialog box If you want to change only one setting during analysis, and you need to change it often, you can display a small box that only contains the required setting. 1.
Page 128 ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument Using scale, position and level knobs The instrument has dedicated rotary knobs to set vertical and horizontal positions and scale, and the trigger level. When you turn a knob, the input box appears in the upper left corner of the screen, showing the parameter name and current value.
Page 129 ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument ● To get the value that was used before the keypad was displayed, tap "Cur". ● To enter a user-defined value, tap the numbers and complete the entry by tap- ping the unit button. –...
Page 130: Messages
The general help explains a dialog box, provides instructions, and general informa- tion. ● Tutorials and videos demonstrate the general usage of the R&S RTE, for example, how to use the SmartGrid. They are available on the internet product page, in the R&S®RTE1000 - Media Center.
Page 131: Using The Help Window
® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument The "Help" window opens and displays the comprehensive description and the cor- responding remote command. You can browse the help for further information. Note: The tooltip icon disables automatically when you tap a parameter. To show another tooltip, tap the tooltip icon again.
Page 132 ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument To search topics for a text string 1. Switch to the "Search" tab. 2. Select the "Keyboard" icon besides the entry field. 3. Enter the string you want to find. If you enter several strings with blanks between, topics containing all words are found (same as AND operator).
Page 133: Instrument Setup
® Instrument setup R&S System setup 4 Instrument setup You can adapt various instrument settings to your requirements, such as language, dis- play appearance, and assign functions to some keys. The chapter describes also the handling of software options. The following setup procedures are described in other chapters of the documentation: ●...
Page 134 ® Instrument setup R&S System setup Firmware version......................134 Bios version.........................134 Image version......................134 Desktop (minimize all)....................135 Computer name, IP Address, DHCP................135 System........................135 Network........................135 Screensaver........................ 135 Display / Monitors: Display Settings................135 Time, date........................136 Log on as........................136 Language........................136 Select setup for firmware update................
Page 135 ® Instrument setup R&S System setup Desktop (minimize all) Minimizes all displayed application windows on the instrument, so that the desktop becomes visible on the screen to access the Windows functionality. This function is also available from the "File" menu. Computer name, IP Address, DHCP Indicates the currently defined computer name, the defined IP address and DHCP address enabling.
Page 136 Your instrument is delivered with the latest firmware version. Firmware updates are provided on the internet at: www.rohde-schwarz.com/firmware/rte. The "Release Notes" describe the improvements and modifications of all firmware ver- sions. They also explain how to update the firmware. They are available along with the firmware on the same web page.
Page 137: Setting The Display Language
® Instrument setup R&S Screen setup "Explore" Opens the Windows file explorer where you can navigate and search for files and folders as usual. Start internet update Starts the "RTxUpdater", which connects to the internet, checks for newer versions, downloads the firmware file, and installs the firmware. Only users with administrator rights can fulfill this task.
Page 138: Screen Settings
® Instrument setup R&S Screen setup 4.2.1 Screen settings Access: [SETUP] > "Screen" tab The settings on this tab are related to the screen display. Note for "Dialog configuration", "Front panel setup" and "Navigation rotary knob" set- tings: These settings are user-specific, they are not reset by [PRESET] and *RST. You can reset them to default values using [FILE] >...
Page 139: Aligning The Touchscreen
® Instrument setup R&S Frontpanel setup Font size Defines the font size of the text in dialog boxes. Dialog transparency Defines the transparency of the dialog box background. For high transparency values, you can see the waveform display in the background, and possibly check the effect of the changed setting.
Page 140: Setup: Luminosity Settings
® Instrument setup R&S Frontpanel setup ● Setup: luminosity settings..................140 ● Hardkeys: function assignment................140 ● Knobs........................141 4.3.1 Setup: luminosity settings Access: "File" menu > "Frontpanel Setup" > "Setup" LCD Intensity Changes the background luminosity of the touchscreen. LED Intensity Defines the luminosity of illuminated front panel keys and rotary knobs.
Page 141: Knobs
® Instrument setup R&S Frontpanel setup Print Button The PRINT key is a shortcut key that initiates an associated action. You can assign one of the following actions to the PRINT key: ● Save a screenshot ● Print a screenshot ●...
Page 142: Display Configuration
® Instrument setup R&S Display configuration Horizontal The horizontalPOSITION / REF POINT knob can change the horizontal position or the reference point. Select the action that you want to perform. See also: Chapter 3.2.3.3, "HORIZONTAL controls", on page 67. Rotary knob acceleration method Selects a method to accelerate the movement of the element on the screen compared to the actual movement of the rotary knob.
Page 143: Display Settings
® Instrument setup R&S Display configuration Diagrams The basic diagram elements can be shown or hidden: grid, crosshair, label, and tab titles. You can also enter user-defined diagram names. Waveforms For waveforms, you can adjust the persistence, the waveform style, and color. You can also annotate the waveforms by adding screen texts.
Page 144 Remote command: on page 1090 DISPlay:PERSistence:INFinite PersistenTime Sets a time factor that controls how long the waveforms points fade away from the dis- play. Thus, the R&S RTE emulates the persistence of analog phosphor screens. User Manual 1326.1032.02 ─ 20...
Page 145 ® Instrument setup R&S Display configuration Remote command: on page 1090 DISPlay:PERSistence:TIME Reset Resets the display, removing persistent all waveform points. Remote command: on page 1091 DISPlay:PERSistence:RESet Intensity This value determines the strength of the waveform line in the diagram. Enter a per- centage between 0 (not visible) and 100% (strong).
Page 146: Color Tables
DISPlay:COLor:SIGNal<m>:USE Source Selects the waveform to which the color table and the labels are assigned. A spectrogram (option R&S RTE-K18) always has the same color as the math (spec- trum) waveform from which it is created. Assigned color table Adjust the waveform colors to suit your preferences. For each of the following wave- form types you can assign a suitable color table: ●...
Page 147: Diagram Layout
® Instrument setup R&S Display configuration The editing table allows you to edit existing color tables or add new ones that can then be assigned to the waveforms. To assign a color table to a waveform, use the "Signal colors / Persistence" tab. See also: ●...
Page 148 ® Instrument setup R&S Display configuration On the "Diagram Layout" tab, you define the elements to be shown in the diagrams, and the position of result boxes. These settings are user-specific, they are not reset by [PRESET] and *RST. You can reset them to default values using [FILE] >...
Page 149 ® Instrument setup R&S Display configuration Show labels If selected, labels mark values on the x- and y-axes in specified intervals in the dia- gram. Remote command: on page 1098 DISPlay:DIAGram:LABels Show div label (x) If selected, the time scale value is shown at the diagram bottom instead of the horizon- tal grid labels.
Page 150: Waveform Labels
® Instrument setup R&S Display configuration Show evaluation gate(s) in zoom If enabled, the available histogram areas, masks, and measurement gates are shown in the zoom diagrams. If the evaluation gate is within the zoom area, the display helps to move or modify the evaluation gates in the zoom window. Make sure that the option is disabled if the zoom area and the evaluation gate are of nearly the same size to avoid conflicts in operation.
Page 151 ® Instrument setup R&S Display configuration Make sure that the correct waveform tab is selected before you enter the labels. Source.........................151 Font size........................151 Labels..........................151 Show labels.........................152 Position mode......................152 Source Selects the waveform to which the label belongs. Font size Defines the size of the labels in the diagram.
Page 152: Performance
Access: "Display" menu > "Show Performance" The "Performance" result box shows information on the current acquisition perfor- mance values of the R&S RTE. The instrument groups acquired waveforms together in a frame, and displays the frame content. The maximum number of frames displayed per second is about 30. The cur- rent number of frames per second is indicated as reciprocal "Time per frame".
Page 153: Adjusting The Display
® Instrument setup R&S Display configuration Remote command: ● on page 1105 DISPlay:CLR 4.4.3 Adjusting the display You can adjust the appearance of several display elements: ● Diagram name, see Chapter 4.4.3.1, "Changing the diagram name", on page 153. ● Waveform colors, see Chapter 4.4.3.2, "Changing waveform colors",...
Page 154 ® Instrument setup R&S Display configuration 3. Tap the "Color" button. 4. In the "Adjust Colors" dialog box, select a predefined color, or define any other RGB color with "User defined Colors". To edit a color table 1. On the "Display" menu, tap "Color Tables". 2.
Page 155: Configuring The Appearance Of Dialog And Result Boxes
® Instrument setup R&S Display configuration Example: In this example, values with a cumulative occurrence under 25% (very short or rare display) are displayed green. Values with an occurrence of 40% are yellow-green. Val- ues with an occurrence of 90% (displayed almost for the entire duration of the signal) are a deep shade of orange.
Page 156: Using The Signal Bar
® Instrument setup R&S Display configuration To change the font size in dialog and result boxes 1. Press [SETUP]. 2. Select the "Screen" tab. 3. To set the font size in points for text in all dialog boxes, change "Font size". Most dialog boxes are optimized for a font size of 19 pt.
Page 157: External Application
® Instrument setup R&S External application Alternatively, tap "Signal Bar" on the "Display" menu. To change the position of the signal bar ► Touch the "Horizontal" label on the top of the signal bar and drag it to the opposite side of the screen.
Page 158: Selfalignment
® Instrument setup R&S Selfalignment The R&S RTE can start an external application on the instrument or in the network (if connected) when an event occurs. The following events can start an application: ● Trigger event ● Mask violation ●...
Page 159: Results
® Instrument setup R&S Selfalignment Start Alignment Starts the self-alignment procedure for all channels. Remote command: on page 1077 *CAL? Date / Time / Overall alignment state Show the date, time and the summary result of the self-alignment process: not aligned, passed or failed.
Page 160: Performing A Self-Alignment
® Instrument setup R&S Self-test 4.6.3 Performing a self-alignment The self-alignment aligns the data from several input channels vertically and horizon- tally to synchronize the timebases, amplitudes and positions. The self-alignment proc- ess includes a basic hardware check. Recommendation on performing the self-alignment: ●...
Page 161: Firmware Update
4.9 Options Additional options for the R&S RTE can be enabled using a license key. To obtain the license key, consult your sales representative. The license type defines the duration of applicability and the portability of a license.
Page 162 ® Instrument setup R&S Options SW option list Shows the activated options. This information provided for administration and trouble- shooting purposes. If you need support for an option, provide this information to the service representative. The "State" of the option indicates whether the installed option is a normal or a beta- release version.
Page 163: Deactivation Options
® Instrument setup R&S Options When you move a portable license, use this function to import the deactivation key that is generated by the "R&S License Manager". See also Chapter 4.9.1.3, "Using a license server", on page 163. 4.9.1.2 Deactivation options Access: [SETUP] >...
Page 164: Hw Options
® Instrument setup R&S Options The R&S®License Server must be set up as described in the R&S®License Server - Managing Floating Licenses - User Manual. You can find the manual in the Windows menu of your instrument: "Start > All Pro- grams >...
Page 165: Options In Beta State
® Instrument setup R&S Options 2. If you received a key in written form, enter the key in the "Enter new option key" field. If you received a key in digital form as a file, tap "Open", navigate to the directory that contains the file, and select the option key file.
Page 166: Acquisition And Waveform Setup
® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Basics 5 Acquisition and waveform setup This chapter describes the horizontal and vertical settings as well as the acquisition and probe setup. 5.1 Basics This chapter provides background information on the essential settings in the vertical and horizontal systems, on acquisition setup and probing.
Page 167 Basics Figure 5-1: Input range and resolution of the ADC With R&S RTE, you can work with multiple diagrams, and each diagram obtains the full vertical resolution, no matter where the diagram is placed. Therefore, use a separate diagram for each waveform instead of the traditional setup that arranges the wave- forms side by side in one diagram.
Page 168: Bandwidth
® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Basics Figure 5-3: R&S RTE setup of multiple waveforms in separate diagrams: best resolution 5.1.1.3 Bandwidth For analog applications, the highest signal frequency determines the required oscillo- scope bandwidth. The oscilloscope bandwidth should be slightly higher than the maxi- mum frequency included in the analog test signal to measure the amplitude with very little measurement error.
Page 169: Sampling And Processing
® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Basics 5.1.2.1 Sampling and processing The A/D converter samples the continuous signal under test at specific points in time and delivers digital values called ADC samples. The rate at which the converter is working is the ADC sample rate, a constant value specified in GHz: f = 1 / T The digital ADC samples are processed according to the acquisition settings.
Page 170: Acquisition Settings
You can combine interpolation and waveform decimation modes with waveform arith- metic. 5.1.2.3 Acquisition control You can run the R&S RTE in two ways: ● RUN CONT: the instrument acquires data until you stop it manually. ● RUN N× SINGLE: the instrument samples and processes a specified number of acquisitions.
Page 171: Horizontal System
® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Basics The determining point of an acquisition is the trigger. The instrument acquires continu- ously and keeps the sample points to fill the pre-trigger part of the waveform record. When the trigger occurs, the instrument continues acquisition until the post-trigger part of the waveform record is filled.
Page 172: Horizontal Position
® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Basics When you set up horizontal parameters, you can choose whether the record length or the resolution remains constant. ● With constant resolution, increasing the time scale also increases the record length, and vice versa. You can limit the record length to a maximum value. ●...
Page 173: Voltage Probes
50 Ω Active, differential 10:1 Floating For a list of recommended probes, refer to the R&S RTE product brochure. Besides the possible input voltage range, two factors are important when selecting a voltage probe: Bandwidth and impedance over frequency. ●...
Page 174: Passive Voltage Probes
® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Basics                   system probe scope To measure the signal with low measurement error, the system bandwidth should be higher than the highest frequency component of the signal.
Page 175: Differential Active Probes
"Setup" and "Probe Attributes" tabs. This data together with the deskew time for a given channel is stored and processed by the R&S RTE. If you connect the probe the next time to the same channel, the infor- mation is fetched and used.
Page 176: Horizontal Settings
® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Horizontal settings Voltage between the positive and negative signal sockets ● Positive single-ended input voltage (V Voltage between the positive signal socket and the ground socket ● Negative single-ended input voltage (V Voltage between the negative signal socket and the ground socket ●...
Page 177: Time Scale
® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Horizontal settings Time scale........................177 Acquisition time......................177 Reference point......................178 Position........................178 Restrict horizontal position to acquisition range............178 Sample rate.........................178 Resolution........................178 Record length......................178 Resolution......................179 ZVC Record length......................179 Resolution / Record length (Resolution dependency)..........179 Auto adjustment (Resolution dependency)..............
Page 178: Position
® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Horizontal settings Reference point Sets the position of the reference point in % of the screen. The reference point marks the rescaling center of the time scale. It is indicated by a grey triangle outline at the top of the diagram.
Page 179: Zvc Resolution
® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Horizontal settings ZVC Resolution Available only, if a R&S RT-ZVC multi-channel power probe probe is connected to the instrument. Displays the current resolution, the time between two waveform samples, of the R&S RT-ZVC multi-channel power probe channel. Remote command: on page 1155 ACQuire:ZRESolution?
Page 180: Roll Mode
All serial buses are disabled ● All digital channels are disabled (MSO option R&S RTE-B1) The roll mode depends also on sample rate and record length. In roll mode, the sample rate limit is 1 MSa/s. At 50 s, the resulting record length limit is 50 MSa.
Page 181: Acquisition
Selects the decimation mode. Decimation reduces the data stream of the ADC to a stream of waveform points with lower sample rate and a less precise time resolution. The R&S RTE uses decimation, if the waveform "Sample rate" is less than the ADC sample rate. In this case, interpolation is not possible.
Page 182 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Horizontal settings There are different methods to define the recorded waveform point out of n sample points: "Sample" One of n samples in a sample interval of the ADC is recorded as waveform point, the other samples are discarded. The time between the two adjacent waveform points is exactly the resolution.
Page 183: Fast Segmentation
® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Horizontal settings ● [HORIZONTAL] > "Fast Segmentation" tab > disable "Acquire maximum" > "Required" ● [MATH] > "Setup" tab > "Mode" is not "Off" > "Average count" The acquisition and average count has several effects: ●...
Page 184 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Horizontal settings Acquisition of n-th wfm Acquisition of 1st wfm Acquisition of 2nd wfm Display 1st wfm Display 2nd wfm ....Replay time Minimized blind time Acquisition Deferred visualization of all acquisitions Figure 5-6: Fast segmentation with deferred processing and display...
Page 185: Vertical Settings
® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Vertical settings To acquire the maximum number, enable "Acquire maximum". The maximum num- ber of acquisitions is shown in the "Required" field. ● Acquire a given number of acquisitions. Enter the number in the "Required" field. The acquisition count (Average count (N-single count)) is always set to the required...
Page 186: Show Channel
® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Vertical settings Make sure that the correct channel tab is selected. The vertical rotary knobs are illumi- nated in the color of the selected channel. Show channel......................186 Ground........................186 Vertical scale....................... 186 Position........................186 Invert channel......................187 Coupling........................
Page 187: Invert Channel
® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Vertical settings By default, the horizontal grid axis remains in the center when the offset is changed. To shift the axis together with the waveform, disable Keep Y-grid fixed in "Display > Dia- gram Layout". Remote command: on page 1118 CHANnel<m>:POSition...
Page 188: Coupled Channels
® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Vertical settings If a Rohde & Schwarz modular probe is connected, the offset of the selected probe mode is used. For example, in CM mode, the offset is the common mode offset. By default, the horizontal grid axis remains in the center when the offset is changed. To shift the axis together with the waveform, disable Keep Y-grid fixed in "Display >...
Page 189: Power Calculation
ADC, which reduces the bandwidth of the signal. Increasing the bandwidth reduces the resulting digital resolution. The high definition is also applied to the digital trigger, thus the R&S RTE can trigger with the same high resolution with which they can display signals.
Page 190: High Definition Settings
500 MHz Remote command: on page 1162 HDEFinition:BWIDth Resolution bits Shows the resulting vertical resolution in high definition mode. The higher the filter bandwidth, the lower the resolution. For details, refer to the R&S RTE Specifications. User Manual 1326.1032.02 ─ 20...
Page 191: Effects Of The High Definition Mode
In the "Channels" dialog box (CH<x>), the "Bandwidth" setting is not available because the bandwidth is set by the high definition filter. For R&S RTE of the 1317.2500.Kxx series only: The minimum vertical scale is 500 μV/div instead of 1 mV in normal mode.
Page 192 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S High definition mode You can change the high definition "Bandwidth" in the "Digital Filter Setup". History Due to the 16-bit word length, the history depth is reduced, less waveforms are saved than in normal mode. Export In high definition mode, waveform data in raw format is exported to file with 16-bit word length, except for peak detect decimation (2 values with 8 bit).
Page 193: Probes
FORMat[:DATA] on page 1082). 5.5 Probes With R&S RTE digital oscilloscopes, you can use various probe types. Mostly these probes are passive and active voltage probes. The "Probes" dialog provides all probe- relevant information. The instrument can detect many probes and read out the probe-specific parameters, for example, bandwidth and attenuation.
Page 194: Shared Probe Settings
Probes with Rohde & Schwarz probe interface (probe box), and also many other passive voltage probes, are recognized by the instrument. The R&S RTE reads out the main characteristics of the probe and displays them. Other probes cannot be detected, but their characteristics are known to the instrument.
Page 195 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Probes The shared probe settings are: Type, Name, Bandwidth....................195 Detect AutoZero, Use AutoZero..................195 External attenuation: Scale, Attenuation..............196 Type, Name, Bandwidth The fields show the characteristics of a recognized or predefined probe for information. If the instrument cannot recognize the probe, and the probe is not known, the "Type"...
Page 196: Settings For The R&S Probe Interface (Voltage Probes)
5.5.2 Settings for the R&S probe interface (voltage probes) Active voltage probes with Rohde & Schwarz probe interface provide special features: the micro button and the ProbeMeter. Furthermore, the R&S RTE can read out the attenuation of the probe. User Manual 1326.1032.02 ─ 20...
Page 197 Micro button action......................197 ProbeMeter......................... 198 Probe unit, Auto attenuation If the probe is recognized by the R&S RTE, the instrument reads the attenuation unit and value from the probe an displays them. Remote command: on page 1125 PROBe<m>:SETup:ATTenuation[:AUTO]? on page 1125 (trigger input)
Page 198 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Probes "Run Continuous" Is the default assignment. Starts or stops the acquisition (same as RUN CONT key). "Run single" Starts a defined number of acquisitions (same as [RUN N× SINGLE] key). "Auto set" Starts the autoset procedure (same as AUTOSET key). "AutoZero"...
Page 199 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Probes ● ProbeMeter measurement results of differential and modular R&S probes You can select the voltage to be measured by the differential active probe: – "Differential / Common Mode": Differential voltage is the voltage between the positive and negative signal sockets.
Page 200: Setup For Passive Probes
® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Probes on page 1130 TRPRobe:PMETer:RESults:NEGative? on page 1129 TRPRobe:PMETer:RESults:DIFFerential? on page 1129 TRPRobe:PMETer:RESults:COMMon? 5.5.3 Setup for passive probes Passive probes are the most widely used probes for oscilloscope measurements. Pas- sive probes require compensation. Figure 5-8: Probe setup for passive probe R&S RT-ZP10 The following shared probe settings are available: ●...
Page 201: Setup For Active Voltage Probes
Active voltage probes with Rohde & Schwarz probe interface have an integrated data memory that contains identification data and individual probe correction parameters. The R&S RTE can detect these probes and read out the data. Furthermore, these probes have a micro button and a ProbeMeter.
Page 202: R&S Rt-Zs Single-Ended Probes
® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Probes 5.5.4.1 R&S RT-ZS single-ended probes Figure 5-9: Probe setup for active single-ended probe R&S RT-ZS10 The only setting for R&S RT-ZS probes is the channel offset. See "Offset" on page 187. User Manual 1326.1032.02 ─ 20...
Page 203: R&S Rt-Zd Differential Probes
® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Probes 5.5.4.2 R&S RT-ZD differential probes Figure 5-10: Probe setup for active differential probe R&S RT-ZD30 The offset is the differential offset. See "Offset" on page 187. Specific settings for R&S RT-ZD probes are the following: CM offset Sets the common-mode offset to compensate for a common DC voltage applied to both input sockets (referenced to the ground socket).
Page 204: R&S Rt-Zpr Power Rail Probes
® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Probes 5.5.4.3 R&S RT-ZPR power rail probes Figure 5-11: Probe setup for power rail probe R&S RT-ZPR The offset is the channel offset. See "Offset" on page 187. If the ProbeMeter is active, an additional function is provided in the "ProbeMeter" result box: Figure 5-12: ProbeMeter result box for Specific settings for R&S RT-ZPR probes are the following:...
Page 205: R&S Rt-Zhd High-Voltage Differential Probes
® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Probes Copy to offset Sets the measured ProbeMeter value as offset. Thus, the value is considered in mea- surements. If the probe is connected to the external trigger input, the function is not available. Remote command: on page 1133 PROBe<m>:SETup:ADVanced:PMToffset...
Page 206: Modular Probes
® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Probes BW limit Activates the lowpass filter in the probe control box and displays the used limit. You can also set the filter directly on the probe control box. Remote command: on page 1134 PROBe<m>:SETup:ADVanced:FILTer on page 1134 TRPRobe:SETup:ADVanced:FILTer...
Page 207: Setup Parameters Of Modular Probes
® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Probes ● Setup parameters of modular probes..............207 ● Termination voltage with R&S RT-ZMA40 SMA module........208 5.5.5.1 Setup parameters of modular probes The basic setup parameters of all modular probes are the measurement mode and the offset settings.
Page 208: Termination Voltage With R&S Rt-Zma40 Sma Module
® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Probes "P" Positive single-ended input voltage (V ). The voltage between the positive input terminal and ground. "N" Negative single-ended input voltage (V ). The voltage between the negative input terminal and ground. Remote command: on page 1135 PROBe<m>:SETup:PRMode on page 1135...
Page 209: Setup For Predefined Probes
Remote command: on page 1138 PROBe<m>:SETup:TERM:MEASure? 5.5.6 Setup for predefined probes Probes that cannot be detected, but their characteristics are known to the R&S RTE are called "Predefined probes". The following shared probe settings are available: ● "Type, Name, Bandwidth"...
Page 210 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Probes The probe attenuation of the selected probe is also shown in the "Setup" tab: ● "Probe unit, Auto attenuation" on page 197 Figure 5-14: Probe setup for transmission line probe R&S RT-ZZ80 Figure 5-15: Probe setup for R&S RT-ZD01 Specific settings for predefined probes are the following: User Manual 1326.1032.02 ─...
Page 211: Setup For Current Probes
® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Probes Predefined probe......................211 Offset to mean......................211 Line impedance......................211 Predefined probe List of probes that are known to the instrument. The instrument lists only probes that match the instrument coupling and, if connected, also the used adapter. Select the used probe on the list.
Page 212 Probes Current probes R&S RT-ZCxx The current probes R&S RT-ZCxx have BNC connectors. They are known to the R&S RTE as predefined probes, see Chapter 5.5.6, "Setup for predefined probes", on page 209. Demagnetizing and zero adjustment is done on the probe, see the pro- be's User Manual for details.
Page 213 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Probes Figure 5-17: Probe setup for current probes R&S RT-ZC20B For all current probes, attenuation or gain is shown in the "Setup" tab, and you can set the offset to mean: ● "Probe unit, Auto attenuation" on page 197 ●...
Page 214: Setup For Unknown Probes
1140 PROBe<m>:SETup:OFFSet:STPRobe 5.5.8 Setup for unknown probes If the R&S RTE cannot detect the probe, and the probe is not a predefined one, you can set the probe parameters manually. The following shared probe settings are available: ●...
Page 215: Probe Attributes
® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Probes Figure 5-18: Probe setup for an unknown probe Set the unit and the attenuation or gain of the probe: "Vertical unit, Attenuation, Gain" on page 201. 5.5.9 Probe attributes The "Probe Attributes" tab provides an overview of all R&S probes connected to an input channel.
Page 216: Calibration Results
1. Connect the R&S RT‑Z2T adapter to the channel input. 2. Connect the probe to the adapter. The instrument identifies the adapter. The R&S RTE lists the supported Tektronix probes as "Predefined probe". 3. Select "Vertical" menu > "Probe Setup".
Page 217: R&S Rt-Zvc Probe
PROBe<m>:SETup:ATTenuation:TDEFprobe 5.6 R&S RT-ZVC probe With the R&S RTE and option R&S RTE-B1E, you can use the R&S RT-ZVC multi- channel power probe. It has an integrated 2- or 4-channel amperemeter and 2- or 4- channel voltmeter. The probe provides parallel measurements of analog or digital, volt- age/current signals with excellent 18-bit resolution.
Page 218: R&S Rt-Zvc Overview
R&S RT-ZVC probe Source Channels You can simultaneously connect a R&S RT-ZVC and a R&S RT-ZL04 to the R&S RTE, but no parallel operation on screen is possible. You can acquire and measure the R&S RT-ZVC or R&S RT-ZL04 together with the analog input channels.
Page 219 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S R&S RT-ZVC probe Make sure that the tab of the correct probe is selected on the left side. State Enables the corresponding channel of the probe. The number of available channels depend on the characteristics of your multi-channel power probe. Remote command: on page 1153 ZVC:Z<m>:V<n>[:STATe]...
Page 220 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S R&S RT-ZVC probe For the voltmeter channels, the Scale, the Offset and the "Position" specify the operat- ing range of the voltmeter. Remote command: on page 1151 ZVC:Z<m>:V<n>:OFFSet on page 1146 ZVC:Z<m>:I<n>:OFFSet Setup Opens the voltage or current settings for the selected channel. See Chapter 5.6.2, "ZVC voltage settings",...
Page 221: Probes
® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S R&S RT-ZVC probe Remote command: on page 1144 ZVC:BANDwidth Resolution coupled Sets the resolution of all R&S RT-ZVC channels. "On" The resolution of the analog channels is applied to R&S RT-ZVC channels. The signal is automatically interpolated or decimated to get the analog resolution.
Page 222: Power Calculation
® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S R&S RT-ZVC probe Part number Displays the material number of the probe. Remote command: on page 1153 ZVC:Z<m>:ID:PARTnumber? 5.6.1.3 Power calculation Access: "Vertical" menu > "ZVC Multi-Channel Probe" > "Power Calculation" tab State Enables the corresponding channel of the probe. The number of available channels depend on the characteristics of your multi-channel power probe.
Page 223: Zvc Voltage Settings
® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S R&S RT-ZVC probe Zero compensation is used to avoid negative currents in measurement results, and to improve the measurement accuracy. The determined compensation is valid as long as the temperature is constant and the probe settings are unchanged. 1.
Page 224 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S R&S RT-ZVC probe ● Offset Channel Selects the voltmeter channel to be configured. State Enables the corresponding voltage channel of the probe. The number of available channels depend on the characteristics of your multi-channel power probe. Remote command: on page 1153 ZVC:Z<m>:V<n>[:STATe]...
Page 225: Zvc Current Settings
® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S R&S RT-ZVC probe Reset Overload Resets the overload indication at the probe. Remote command: on page 1151 ZVC:Z<m>:V<n>:OVERload:RSTO 5.6.3 ZVC current settings Access: "Vertical" menu > "ZVC Multi-Channel Probe" > "Setup" dialog > "Setup" of current channel See also: ●...
Page 226 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S R&S RT-ZVC probe Remote command: on page 1145 ZVC:Z<m>:I<n>:BANDwidth? Position Moves the selected signal up or down in the diagram. The visual effect is the same as for Offset. While the offset sets a current, position is a graphical setting given in divi- sions.
Page 227: Differential Signals
ZVC:Z<m>:I<n>:OVERload:RSTO 5.7 Differential signals With R&S RTE, you can easily analyze differential signals using single-ended probes, or even cables. The instrument processes the input of single-ended probes on analog channels and creates the differential and common mode waveforms. Similar to Rohde &...
Page 228: Settings Of Differential Signals
® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Differential signals 5.7.1 Settings of differential signals Access: "Vertical" menu > "Differential Signals" Figure 5-19: Setup of differential signals Enable Activates the differential signal. Remote command: on page 1157 DIFFerential<m>:STATe P, N, Switch Select the analog input channel of the positive and negative signal. For differential signal 1, analog Ch1 and Ch3 are used.
Page 229: Vertical Setup Of Differential Signals
® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Differential signals "Differential" Displays the differential signal as a new waveform. "Common" Displays the common mode signal as a new waveform. Remote command: on page 1158 DIFFerential<m>:AOUTput on page 1158 DIFFerential<m>:BOUTput Vertical scale, Offset Vertical scale and offset of differential and common mode waveforms can be set directly in the differential setup, or in the "Vertical Setup"...
Page 230: Analysis Of Differential Signals
® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Digital filter setup Remote command: on page 1159 DIFFerential<m>:COUPling Offset Sets the offset of differential and common mode waveforms. Vertical settings of P and N output are the vertical settings of the input channels. Remote command: on page 1159 DIFFerential<m>:COMMon:OFFSet...
Page 231: Horizontal Accuracy
® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Horizontal accuracy Digital Signal Processing (DSP). You can filter the acquisition channels as well as the trigger channel signal. For example, RF reject for the trigger signal ensures that trig- gering will not be caused by unexpected glitches. If High definition mode is active, digital filter settings are enabled automatically.
Page 232: Skew
® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Horizontal accuracy The "Horizontal Accuracy" dialog box contains standard and optional settings to improve measurement and analysis accuracy and to reduce jitter effects. 5.9.1 Skew Access: "Horizontal" menu > "Skew". Skew compensates signal propagation differences between channels caused by the different length of cables, probes, and other sources.
Page 233: Reference Clock
Access: "Horizontal" menu > "Skew" > "Reference clock" tab. Input and output reference signals are connected to the [REF IN/OUT] connector on the rear panel of R&S RTE. You can select an internal or external reference clock on the "Reference clock" tab.
Page 234: Setting Up The Waveform
® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Setting up the waveform 5.10 Setting up the waveform This chapter contains the fundamental procedures for setting up the acquisition and adjusting the channel waveforms. 5.10.1 Adjusting passive probes When using a passive probe, you have to compensate it when you connect it to the instrument the first time.
Page 235: Adjusting The Signal Input Manually
® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Setting up the waveform 5.10.3 Adjusting the signal input manually 1. Connect the probe to the input connector [CH ×]. The instrument recognizes the probe and turns on the channel. 2. On the "Horizontal" menu, tap "Setup". 3.
Page 236: Using The Roll Mode
® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Setting up the waveform If "Envelope" or "Average" is selected in the "Acquisition" tab, one acquisition means a cycle containing as many acquired waveforms as required to satisfy the reset conditions. Prerequisites: ● Probes are connected. ●...
Page 237: Using Fast Segmentation
® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Setting up the waveform 5.10.7 Using fast segmentation Fast Segmentation reduces the dead time between two waveform acquisition cycles. The settings are described in Chapter 5.2.3, "Fast segmentation", on page 183. 1. On the "Horizontal" menu, tap "Fast Segmentation". 2.
Page 238: Triggers
● Trigger mode The R&S RTE provides various trigger types for troubleshooting and signal analysis, for example, edge trigger, glitch trigger, interval trigger, pattern trigger, and much more. For complex tasks like verifying and debugging designs, advanced trigger settings are available: ●...
Page 239: Setting Up The Trigger
® Triggers R&S Setting up the trigger Trigger sequence A complex trigger sequence joins two or more separate trigger conditions with an optional delay time and an optional reset time or reset condition. Similar setups are also known as multi-step trigger or A/B trigger. Trigger information Information on the most important trigger settings is shown in the trigger label on top of the signal bar.
Page 240: Positioning The Trigger
® Triggers R&S Setting up the trigger Proceed as follows: 1. Press the [TRIGGER] key on the front panel. The "Trigger" dialog box opens with the "Setup" tab. 2. At the left hand-side, select the "A" vertical sub tab. 3. Tap the "Source" button and select the trigger source. 4.
Page 241: Setting Up An A → B → R Trigger Sequence
® Triggers R&S Trigger types 6.2.4 Setting up an A → B → R trigger sequence The complete configuration of a complex "A → B → R" trigger sequence consists of: ● A-trigger condition ● B-trigger condition in the same way as for the A-trigger, and optional delay time between the two triggers ●...
Page 242: Basic Trigger Settings
® Triggers R&S Trigger types ● Timeout......................... 250 ● Interval........................251 ● Slew rate....................... 252 ● Data2Clock trigger....................254 ● State........................255 ● Pattern........................256 ● Serial pattern......................258 ● TV/Video trigger....................259 ● Line trigger......................263 ● Triggering on serial buses..................264 ● Triggering on parallel buses and digital channels..........
Page 243: Edge
® Triggers R&S Trigger types signals related to the power line frequency, such as lighting equipment and power supply devices. ● Serial bus, D0...D15, Logic, Parallel bus 1...4: If options with trigger functionality are installed, the variety of trigger sources is enhanced with specific trigger sources.
Page 244: Glitch
® Triggers R&S Trigger types The edge trigger is the most common trigger type. It is well known from analog oscillo- scopes; and you can use it for analog and digital signals. The trigger condition is fulfilled when the signal from the trigger source passes the specified threshold voltage in the specified direction (slope).
Page 245: Width
® Triggers R&S Trigger types Polarity Indicates the polarity of a pulse, that is the direction of the first pulse slope. "Positive" Selects positive going pulses. "Negative" Selects negative going pulses. "Either" Selects both positive and negative going pulses. Remote command: on page 1171 TRIGger<m>:GLITch:POLarity on page 1174...
Page 246 ® Triggers R&S Trigger types The width trigger compares the pulse width (duration of a pulse) with a given time limit. It detects pulses with an exact pulse width, pulses shorter or longer than a given time, and pulses inside or outside the allowable time range. The pulse width is measured at the trigger level.
Page 247: Runt
® Triggers R&S Trigger types ±Delta Defines a range around the given width value. The combination "Range" = Within and "±Delta" = 0 triggers on pulses with a pulse width that equals "Width". The combination "Range" = Outside and "±Delta" = 0 means to trigger on pulse widths ≠...
Page 248: Window
® Triggers R&S Trigger types Upper level Sets the upper voltage threshold. Remote command: on page 1174 TRIGger<m>:LEVel<n>:RUNT:UPPer Lower level Sets the lower voltage threshold. Remote command: on page 1174 TRIGger<m>:LEVel<n>:RUNT:LOWer Range Selects how the time limit of the runt pulse is defined: "Any runt"...
Page 249 ® Triggers R&S Trigger types Vertical condition Selects how the signal run is compared with the window: "Enter" Triggers when the signal crosses the upper or lower level and thus enters the window made up of these two levels. "Exit" Triggers when the signal leaves the window.
Page 250: Timeout
® Triggers R&S Trigger types "Longer" Triggers if the signal crosses vertical limits after the specified "Width" time is reached. Remote command: on page 1177 TRIGger<m>:WINDow:TIME Width For the ranges "Within" and "Outside", the width defines the center of a time range which is defined by the limits "±Delta".
Page 251: Interval
® Triggers R&S Trigger types "Stays high" The signal level stays above the trigger level. "Stays low" The signal level stays below the trigger level. "High or low" The signal level stays above or below the trigger level. Remote command: on page 1178 TRIGger<m>:TIMeout:RANGe Time...
Page 252: Slew Rate
® Triggers R&S Trigger types "Within" Triggers on pulse intervals inside a given range. The range is defined by "Interv. width" and "±Delta". "Outside" Triggers on intervals outside a given range. The range definition is the same as for "Within" range. "Shorter"...
Page 253 ® Triggers R&S Trigger types "Both" Selects the rising as well as the falling edge. This option is not availa- ble if the trigger source is the external trigger input. Remote command: on page 1168 TRIGger<m>:EDGE:SLOPe on page 1170 TRIGger<m>:ANEDge:SLOPe on page 1181 TRIGger<m>:SLEW:SLOPe Upper level...
Page 254: Data2Clock Trigger
® Triggers R&S Trigger types 6.3.10 Data2Clock trigger Access: [TRIGGER] > "Setup" tab > "Type = "Data2Clock"" With the "Data2Clock" trigger you can analyze the relative timing between two signals: a data signal and the synchronous clock signal. Many systems require, that the data signal must be steady for some time before and after the clock edge, for example, the data transmission on parallel interfaces.
Page 255: State
® Triggers R&S Trigger types Data level Sets the voltage level for the data signal. At this level, the setup and hold time is mea- sured. Remote command: on page 1166 TRIGger<m>:LEVel<n>[:VALue] Couple levels (Trigger level and hysteresis coupling) Sets the trigger levels and hysteresis values for all channels to the values of the cur- rently selected trigger source.
Page 256: Pattern
® Triggers R&S Trigger types The individual settings are: ● "Slope" on page 244 ● "Pattern" on page 256 ● "Trigger Levels" on page 257 ● "Find level" on page 243 ● "Couple levels (Trigger level and hysteresis coupling)" on page 255 6.3.12 Pattern Access: [TRIGGER] >...
Page 257 ® Triggers R&S Trigger types "Coupling" The current coupling or ground connection is shown for each channel and can be changed directly in the pattern, if necessary. "Boolean Defines the logical operation on the digital signal resulting from the comparison with the trigger level. operator"...
Page 258: Serial Pattern
® Triggers R&S Trigger types Remote command: on page 1188 TRIGger<m>:PATTern:MODE on page 1188 TRIGger<m>:PATTern:TIMeout:MODE on page 1189 TRIGger<m>:PATTern:TIMeout[:TIME] on page 1190 TRIGger<m>:PATTern:WIDTh:DELTa on page 1189 TRIGger<m>:PATTern:WIDTh:RANGe on page 1189 TRIGger<m>:PATTern:WIDTh[:WIDTh] 6.3.13 Serial pattern Access: [TRIGGER] > "Setup" tab > "Type = Serial Pattern" The serial pattern is used to trigger on signals with serial data patterns in relation to a clock signal - for example, on bus signals like the I²C bus.
Page 259: Tv/Video Trigger
® Triggers R&S Trigger types Clock level Sets the voltage level for the clock signal. Remote command: on page 1191 TRIGger<m>:SPATtern:CSOurce:LEVel Data level Sets the voltage level for the data signal. If the signal value is higher than the data level, the state is 1. Below the level, the sig- nal state is 0.
Page 260 Most video signals have an output impedance of 75 Ω. The channel inputs of the R&S RTE have an input impedance of 50 Ω or 1 MΩ. Make sure to provide the ade- quate matching to ensure amplitude fidelity. A simple 75 Ω feed-through termination combined with 1 MΩ...
Page 261 ® Triggers R&S Trigger types HDTV standards are indicated by the number of active lines, the scanning system (p for progressive scanning, i for interlaced scanning) and the frame rate. For interlaced scanning, the field rate is used instead of the frame rate. 1080p/24sF is an HDTV stan- dard using progressive segmented frame scanning.
Page 262 ® Triggers R&S Trigger types Remote command: on page 1166 TRIGger<m>:LEVel<n>[:VALue] Signal polarity Sets the polarity of the signal. Note that the sync pulse has the opposite polarity, for example, a positive signal has a negative sync pulse. Figure 6-2: Signal with positive polarity and tri-level sync pulse Remote command: on page 1194 TRIGger<m>:TV:POLarity...
Page 263: Line Trigger
® Triggers R&S Trigger types Line period This setting is available for user-defined video signals if "Standard" is set to "Custom". Remote command: on page 1196 TRIGger<m>:TV:CUSTom:LDURation Pulse width Sets the width of the sync pulse. Pulse width This setting is available for user-defined video signals if "Standard" is set to "Custom". Remote command: on page 1196 TRIGger<m>:TV:CUSTom:SDURation...
Page 264: Triggering On Serial Buses
6.3.17 Triggering on parallel buses and digital channels Triggering on digital signals requires the Mixed Signal Option. The option is described Chapter 14, "Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTE-B1)", on page 898. For information on triggering, see Chapter 14.3.1, "Trigger settings for digital signals and parallel buses",...
Page 265: Noise Reject
® Triggers R&S Noise Reject The following methods are available: "Time" Defines the holdoff directly as a time period. The next trigger occurs only after the "Holdoff time" has passed. "Events" Defines the holdoff as a number of trigger events. The next trigger only occurs when this number of events is reached.
Page 266 ® Triggers R&S Noise Reject Hysteresis mode Selects how the hysteresis is set. "Auto" This is the recommended mode. The hysteresis is set by the instru- ment to reject the internal noise of the instrument. "Manual" The hysteresis is defined directly in absolute or relative values. Remote command: on page 1201 TRIGger<m>:LEVel<n>:NOISe[:STATe]...
Page 267: Control / Action
The action settings define what happens when a trigger occurs. All available actions can be initiated at the same time. The R&S RTE can provide an external trigger signal to synchronize the measurements of other instruments. The trigger out signal is also adjusted and enabled in the "Ctrl/ Action"...
Page 268 ® Triggers R&S Control / action Trigger mode Sets the trigger mode which determines the behavior of the instrument if no trigger occurs. The current setting is shown on the trigger label on top of the signal bar. To toggle quickly between "Auto" and "Normal" mode, use the [MODE] key on the front panel (in "Trigger"...
Page 269 ® Triggers R&S Control / action Force Trigger If the acquisition is running in normal mode and no valid trigger occurs, forcing the trig- ger provokes an immediate single acquisition. Thus you can confirm that a signal is available and use the waveform display to determine how to trigger on it. If you need this function frequently, you can add the "Force Trigger"...
Page 270: Sequence
® Triggers R&S Sequence Trigger out signal setup Defines the pulse that is provided to the [TRIGGER OUTPUT] connector on the rear panel. A trigger out pulse can be provided either when a trigger occurs, or when a mask test violation occurs, or when a limit check violation in a measurement occurs.
Page 271: B-Trigger Setup
® Triggers R&S Sequence A → B → R The trigger sequence "A → B → R" consists of two subsequent conditions: A-trigger and B-trigger with optional B-trigger delay and count. In addition, a reset condition R can be configured: timeout or R-trigger condition. A-, B-, and R-triggers are configured in the same way.
Page 272: R-Trigger Setup
® Triggers R&S Sequence Couple trigger levels Sets the trigger levels to the values of the current trigger condition. Each channel has its own trigger level. Only available in "A → B → R" sequences. Example: If the "A" tab is selected in the "Setup" tab, and the trigger level for C1 is 70 mV, the coupling sets the trigger levels for C1 in the B- and R trigger conditions also to 70 mV.
Page 273: External Trigger Input
® Triggers R&S External trigger input Reset timeout / Timeout If timeout is enabled, the instrument waits for the "Timeout" time for the specified num- ber of B-triggers. If no trigger occurs during that time, the sequence is restarted with the A-trigger.
Page 274: Probe Setup: Extern Tab
Most of the R&S RTE trigger types use the digitized trigger signal. If the trigger source is the external trigger input, the trigger comparator uses the analog input signal.
Page 275: External Trigger Setup
® Triggers R&S External trigger input ● on page 1131 TRPRobe:SETup:ATTenuation:MANual ● on page 1131 TRPRobe:SETup:ATTenuation:MODE ● on page 1131 TRPRobe:SETup:ATTenuation:UNIT ● on page 1125 TRPRobe:SETup:ATTenuation[:AUTO]? ● on page 1124 TRPRobe:SETup:NAME? ● on page 1125 TRPRobe:SETup:BANDwidth? ● on page 1132 TRPRobe:SETup:CMOFfset ●...
Page 276 ® Triggers R&S External trigger input Ground If the selected trigger source is the external trigger input, you can connect the trigger input to the ground. Remote command: on page 1170 TRIGger<m>:ANEDge:GND Coupling 50 Ω You can set the coupling in the trigger configuration. "DC 50 Ω"...
Page 277: Acquisition Info
® Triggers R&S Acquisition info Slope Sets the edge type for the trigger condition. "Positive" Selects the rising edge, that is a positive voltage change. "Negative" Selects the falling edge, that is a negative voltage change. "Both" Selects the rising as well as the falling edge. This option is not availa- ble if the trigger source is the external trigger input.
Page 278: Waveform Analysis
7.1.1 Methods of zooming The R&S RTE provides various ways of zooming: You define the section of a diagram that you want to magnify, and the zoomed view is shown in a separate zoom diagram.
Page 279 ® Waveform analysis R&S Zoom Figure 7-1: Numeric zoom using start and stop values – Specifying the x- and y-position of the centerpoint of the area plus a range for the x- and y-axes; the area defined by that centerpoint and the ranges is zoomed.
Page 280: Zoom Settings
® Waveform analysis R&S Zoom 7.1.2 Zoom settings The zoom area, i.e. the section to be enlarged, can be defined using two different methods: ● Using the zoom functions on the toolbar and draw the zoom area on the touch- screen ●...
Page 281: Start And Stop Settings
® Waveform analysis R&S Zoom 7.1.2.2 Start and stop settings The "Start/Stop" tab allows you to specify start and stop values for the x- and y-axes. The acquired data within these ranges is zoomed. Selected diagram Indicates which of the waveform diagrams is selected for zooming. Zoom overlay Shows all zooms of a diagram in one zoom window.
Page 282: Position And Range Settings
® Waveform analysis R&S Zoom Remote command: on page 1219 LAYout:ZOOM:VERTical:RELative:STOP on page 1218 LAYout:ZOOM:VERTical:ABSolute:STOP Full height Uses the full diagram height for the zoom area. Only horizontal zoom settings can be changed. Position coupling Enables or disables the position coupling of coupled zooms. If position coupling is enabled and you move one zoom area, the other coupled zoom areas are moved, too, and keep their distance.
Page 283 ® Waveform analysis R&S Zoom Vertical Defines whether absolute or relative values are used to specify the y-axis values. Remote command: on page 1216 LAYout:ZOOM:VERTical:MODE on page 1386 SEARch:RESDiagram:VERT:MODE Position / Relative position (vertical) Defines the y-value of the centerpoint of the zoom area. Remote command: on page 1217 LAYout:ZOOM:VERTical:ABSolute:POSition...
Page 284: Zooming For Details
® Waveform analysis R&S Zoom Remote command: on page 1213 LAYout:ZOOM:POSCoupling Horizontal Defines whether absolute or relative values are used to specify the x-axis values. Remote command: on page 1213 LAYout:ZOOM:HORZ:MODE on page 1385 SEARch:RESDiagram:HORZ:MODE Position / Relative position (horizontal) Defines the x-value of the centerpoint of the zoom area.
Page 285 ® Waveform analysis R&S Zoom 2. Touch the position that you want to define as one corner of the zoom area. Then drag your finger to the opposite corner of the zoom area. While you drag your finger on the touchscreen, a dotted rectangle indicates the current zoom area.
Page 286 ® Waveform analysis R&S Zoom If the rectangle area is too small to select by tapping, press the CHECKMARK key in the navigation area to toggle between area adjustment and edge adjustment modes. 5. Touch the edge that you want to move, and drag it to the required position. To optimize the zoom definition of an active zoom diagram, double-tap the zoom dia- gram.
Page 287 ® Waveform analysis R&S Zoom To define the zoom area numerically using start-stop values 1. On the "Display" menu, tap "Zoom". 2. Select the Start and stop settings tab. 3. Under "Vertical mode", select whether you want to define absolute or relative y-axis values.
Page 288 ® Waveform analysis R&S Zoom To define multiple zoom areas graphically, simply repeat the steps described in define the zoom area graphically on the touchscreen - for each area. Numerically, pro- ceed as follows: 1. On the "Display" menu, tap "Zoom". 2.
Page 289 ® Waveform analysis R&S Zoom To define coupled zoom areas You can define multiple zoom areas for one diagram that are coupled. If you change the size of one zoom area, the size of all coupled zoom areas is changed as well. Fur- thermore, you can couple also the position in order to move all coupled zooms at once.
Page 290: Reference Waveforms
® Waveform analysis R&S Reference waveforms Note: You can combine hardware zoom and normal zoom - first use the hardware zoom, then the zoom into the display. The reverse approach is also possible: Cre- ate a zoom diagram, and then apply the hardware zoom to the waveform diagram. Both the waveform and the zoom diagrams are changed.
Page 291 ® Waveform analysis R&S Reference waveforms a) In the "Reference" tab, tap the "Selected source" icon and select a source from the selection list. The source can be any active signal, math, or other reference waveform. b) Tap the "Update with" button to update the current reference waveform with the source data.
Page 292: Settings For Reference Waveforms
® Waveform analysis R&S Reference waveforms To view a reference waveform ► You can view a reference waveform, using the "Graphical Recall" function. For details, see: Chapter 12.1.3, "Graphical Recall function", on page 474. 7.2.2 Settings for reference waveforms To compare waveforms and analyze differences between waveforms, you can use up to four reference waveforms R1 to R4.
Page 293: Scaling
® Waveform analysis R&S Reference waveforms Remote command: on page 1220 REFCurve<m>:SOURce Update with selected source Copies the selected source waveform with all its settings to the memory of the refer- ence waveform. If the acquisition is running, the reference waveform is a snapshot. Remote command: on page 1222 REFCurve<m>:UPDate...
Page 294 ® Waveform analysis R&S Reference waveforms Vertical Vertical reference scaling changes the vertical display of the reference waveform inde- pendently of the settings of the source waveform. Enable ← Vertical If enabled, the vertical offset is applied to the reference waveform. Remote command: on page 1223 REFCurve<m>:RESCale:VERTical:STATe...
Page 295: Mathematics
® Waveform analysis R&S Mathematics 7.3 Mathematics Math waveforms are calculated waveforms. You can define up to eight math wave- forms and display them on the screen, and use it as source for further analysis. Math waveforms are defined by mathematical expressions (formulas). You can enter mathematical expressions using different methods: ●...
Page 296: Math Setup - General Settings
® Waveform analysis R&S Mathematics 5. Enter the "Vertical scale" factor (per division). If necessary, add a "Vertical offset". By default the instrument performs an automatic scaling. Tip: You can also use the vertical [SCALE] rotary knob for scaling. In this case, the scale mode is set to "Manual"...
Page 297 ® Waveform analysis R&S Mathematics └ Mode......................298 └ Reset......................298 └ Average count (N-single count)..............298 Enable math signal If activated, a diagram for the defined math waveform is displayed on the touch screen. Remote command: on page 1227 CALCulate:MATH<m>:STATe Vertical Scale Functions to set the vertical parameters of the math waveform.
Page 298 ® Waveform analysis R&S Mathematics Mode ← Arithmetic Waveform arithmetic builds the resulting waveform from several consecutive acquisi- tions and subsequent math calculations of the signal. For details, see "Arithmetic" on page 182. "Original" The original results are displayed. "Envelope" The envelope curve of all acquired and calculated results is dis- played.
Page 299: Basic Editor
® Waveform analysis R&S Mathematics Remote command: on page 1115 ACQuire:COUNt 7.3.3 Basic editor In the"Basic" editor, you can define the most common mathematical formulas without knowing their correct syntax. Remote command: ● on page 1227 CALCulate:MATH<m>[:EXPRession][:DEFine] 7.3.3.1 Settings in the Basic editor Source 1 / 2.........................299 Operator........................
Page 300: Defining A Formula In The Basic Editor
® Waveform analysis R&S Mathematics "dx/dt" Differentiates the source value with respect to the time value. Not possible on envelope waveforms and waveforms with "Peak detect" decimation. "log(x)" Calculates the logarithm of the source value based on 10. "ln(x)" Calculates the natural logarithm of the source value (based on e). "ld(x)"...
Page 301: Advanced
® Waveform analysis R&S Mathematics 4. Tap the "Operator" icon and select the mathematical function. For details on available operators, see "Operator" on page 299. 5. If the operator requires additional parameters, enter them in the input fields. 7.3.4 Advanced In the "Advanced"...
Page 302 ® Waveform analysis R&S Mathematics Remote command: ● on page 1227 CALCulate:MATH<m>[:EXPRession][:DEFine] Buttons of the formula editor and their usage Table 7-1: Basics Icon Description Usage/Comment, FormulaEditor expression left bracket enclose operands comma separates operands right bracket enclose operands e / π math.
Page 303: Math Functions: Algebra
® Waveform analysis R&S Mathematics Icon Description Usage/Comment, FormulaEditor expression exponentiation with base 10 Enter expression complete insert expression in "Setup" dialog and close the formula editor Clear clear expression in editor restart editing Delete remove selected part of expression Back Backspace remove last symbol, operator or operand to the...
Page 304: Math Functions: Trigonometry
® Waveform analysis R&S Mathematics Icon Description Usage/Comment, FormulaEditor expression d/dx derivation of x derivation(x,y) with x = waveform and y = number of skipped sam- ples (noise reject) ax+b scaling of x rescale(x,a,b) 7.3.4.3 Math functions: trigonometry Table 7-5: Trigonometry (More keys) Icon Description Usage/Comment, FormulaEditor expression...
Page 305: Math Functions: Fft
® Waveform analysis R&S Mathematics Icon Description Usage/Comment, FormulaEditor expression ≥ greater or equal >= More display additional keys 7.3.4.6 Math functions: FFT Table 7-8: FFT (More keys) Icon Description Usage/Comment, FormulaEditor expression |FFT| magnitude of FFT value fftmag(x) FFT (φ) FFT phase value fftphi(x) FFT -dφ*df...
Page 306 ® Waveform analysis R&S Mathematics The R&S RTE uses only the real part of the signal. Two modes of normalization are supported: biased and unbiased. Equation 7-1: Biased correlation Equation 7-2: Unbiased correlation Mathematic background for auto correlation: Equation 7-3: Biased auto correlation Equation 7-4: Unbiased auto correlation The R&S RTE uses only the real part of the signal.
Page 307: Math Functions: Filter And Power
7.3.4.9 Transfer functions of a step-like signal The R&S RTE provides two functions to calculate the transfer function of a system out of its step response. These functions are not supported by the formula editor, but you can enter them directly in the "Advanced" tab in the "Math Setup" dialog box. To enter the formula, you need a keyboard (onscreen keyboard or a connected usual one).
Page 308 ® Waveform analysis R&S Mathematics Math expression Description Step2FreqRespNormMag(x,points) Normalized magnitude of transfer function in fre- Where: quency domain ● x is the waveform (channel, math, reference) Example: ● points is the number of points in the resulting Step2FreqRespNormMag(Ch1,2000) math waveform (min. 1000 points) Step2FreqRespNormPhi(x,points,time offset) Normalized phase of transfer function in frequency Where:...
Page 309: Defining A Formula In The Formula Editor
Insert the closing bracket using the ")" key. The resulting expression could be, for example: rescale(Ch1Wfm1,3,4) 7.3.5 Filters The R&S RTE provides several ways to filter the input signal: ● Lowpass filter by selecting a bandwidth limit in the acquisition path (vertical chan- nel settings) "Bandwith"...
Page 310: Fir Filter In The Math Setup
® Waveform analysis R&S Mathematics You can set up a FIR-filtered math waveform in the basic math editor, or in the advanced editor. Both ways are described below in this chapter. 7.3.5.1 FIR filter in the math setup The finite impulse response filter ("Operator" = FIR) is a filter to create filtered wave- forms with lowpass, highpass, or bandpass.
Page 311: Fir Filter In The Formula Editor
Matlab and the sample rate at the oscilloscope to the same value. If the values differ, the filter is shifted in frequency. In R&S RTE, in the "Basic" math editor, select the filter "Type" = "User defined", and load the CSV file.
Page 312: History
® Waveform analysis R&S History 7.4 History The history accesses the data of previous acquisitions and provides them for further analysis. 7.4.1 About history If a continuous acquisition runs, the captured data is stored in the sample memory and the current acquisition is processed and shown on the display. After the acquisition was stopped, the history accesses the captured samples that were stored, displays these samples as history waveforms, and makes them available for further analysis.
Page 313: History Setup
® Waveform analysis R&S History "Play" button. Closing the quick-access "History" dialog box, or starting a new acquisi- tion disables the history mode. Export of history waveforms You can export history data, see "To save the history data" on page 317. 7.4.2 History setup The "History"...
Page 314 ® Waveform analysis R&S History If a history replay is running, the field shows the number of the currently shown acquisi- tion. Remote command: on page 1232 CHANnel<m>[:WAVeform<n>]:HISTory:CURRent Start acq Sets the index of the first (oldest) acquisition to be displayed or exported. The index is always negative.
Page 315: Information
® Waveform analysis R&S History Time stamp The time stamp shows the time of the currently displayed history acquisition. Thus, the time relation between acquisitions is always available. The time stamp "Mode" can be absolute or relative: ● In "Absolute" mode, the instrument shows the date and the daytime of the current acquisition.
Page 316: Using History
® Waveform analysis R&S History 7.4.3 Using history You can access the history waveforms in two ways: ● Display a particular acquisition. ● Replay all or a part of the saved waveforms to track the signal run. Furthermore, you can export history data to a file. ●...
Page 317 ® Waveform analysis R&S History To replay history waveforms If you want to see the complete acquisition series without any setup, simply tap "Play" in the quick-access "History" dialog box. For specific analysis of history data, use the hestory "Viewer" setup. 1.
Page 318: Xy-Diagram
® Waveform analysis R&S XY-diagram b) Enter the number of the required acquisition in "Acq index". The newest acqui- sition in the memory always has the index "0". Older acquisition have a nega- tive index. c) Tap "Save" or "Save As" to save the waveform data to the specified file. 9.
Page 319 ® Waveform analysis R&S XY-diagram Enable If activated, the XY-waveform is active and shown in a diagram, or it is minimized in a signal icon. Remote command: on page 1236 WAVeform<m>:XYCurve:STATe X-source Defines the signal source that supplies the x-values of the XY-diagram. Select one of the following: ●...
Page 320: Displaying An Xy-Diagram
® Waveform analysis R&S XY-diagram Remote command: on page 1237 WAVeform<m>:XYCurve:YSOurce Constant XY-ratio If enabled, the x- and y-axes maintain a constant ratio in the diagram. Remote command: on page 1236 WAVeform<m>:XYCurve:RATio Swap XY Replaces the source of the x-axis with the source of the y-axis and vice versa. Remote command: on page 1236 WAVeform<m>:XYCurve:SWAP...
Page 321 ® Waveform analysis R&S XY-diagram To set up an XY-diagram 1. On the "Display" menu, tap "XY-diagram". 2. Enable the "XY-diagram". 3. In the "X-source" field, define the signal source that supplies the x-values of the XY-diagram. Select one of the following: ●...
Page 322: Measurements
Cursor measurements 8 Measurements Using the R&S RTE you can perform and display different measurements simultane- ously, based on the active signal or math waveforms. The color of the results in the result table corresponds with the source waveform color.
Page 323: Cursor Measurements On Time-Based Waveforms
® Measurements R&S Cursor measurements For details on using the result box, see Chapter 3.4.8, "Displaying results", on page 124 and "Result position" on page 330. 8.1.1.1 Cursor measurements on time-based waveforms The cursor for measurement on time-based waveforms returns the following results. The results are displayed automatically when a cursor measurement is enabled.
Page 324: Using Cursors
® Measurements R&S Cursor measurements 8.1.2 Using cursors You can start cursor measurements by using the "Cursor" icon on the toolbar, or using the [CURSOR] key. For detailed configuration, use the "Cursor" dialog box. ● Starting a simple cursor measurement..............324 ●...
Page 325: Configuring A Cursor Measurement
® Measurements R&S Cursor measurements 8.1.2.2 Configuring a cursor measurement To modify the position of the cursor lines, you can drag the lines on the screen. In addi- tion, various settings are possible to refine the measurement. The complete configuration of cursor measurements is provided in the "Cursors" dialog box.
Page 326: Configuring The Cursor Display
® Measurements R&S Cursor measurements Optionally, define a peak excursion. Peak excursion is the minimum level value by which the waveform must rise or fall so that it is identified as a maximum or a mini- mum by the search functions. 10.
Page 327: Setup Tab
® Measurements R&S Cursor measurements 8.1.3.1 Setup tab Access: [CURSOR] key > "Setup" tab The "Setup" tab contains the settings for cursor measurements. Figure 8-3: Setup for cursor on 1 source Figure 8-4: Setup for cursor on 2 sources Cursor set (vertical tabs) The settings for each cursor measurement (or cursor set) are configured on separate tabs.
Page 328 ® Measurements R&S Cursor measurements Type Defines the cursor type to be used for the measurement. ● Horizontal cursors (Y-cursors) Horizontal cursors are positioned automatically along the waveform and can be adjusted manually ● Vertical cursors (X-cursors) Both vertical cursor lines are set automatically to the trigger position, and you can reposition them manually.
Page 329 ® Measurements R&S Cursor measurements Y user position 1, Y user position 2 Defines the position of the horizontal cursor lines. The setting corresponds to the V1 and V2 values in the "Cursor Results" box. If "Track waveform" is enabled, the user setting is disabled and the measurement results are displayed in the "Cursor Results"...
Page 330: Labels / Display Tab
® Measurements R&S Cursor measurements 8.1.3.2 Labels / display tab Access: [CURSOR] key > "Labels / Display" tab The settings in this tab configure the display of the cursors. Cursor set (vertical tabs) The settings for each cursor measurement (or cursor set) are configured on separate tabs.
Page 331: Peak Search Tab
® Measurements R&S Cursor measurements Remote command: on page 1245 CURSor<m>:SIAD 8.1.3.3 Peak search tab Access: [CURSOR] key > "Peak Search" tab The settings on this tab are only available in spectrum mode, i.e. the source of the cur- sor measurement is an FFT math waveform. In this case, the cursors can indicate the results of a peak search on the waveform.
Page 332 ® Measurements R&S Cursor measurements Cursor to center Sets the vertical cursor line C1 to the center frequency. Remote command: on page 1247 CURSor<m>:FFT:TOCenter Center to cursor Sets the center frequency to the frequency value that is measured at cursor line C1. Remote command: on page 1247 CURSor<m>:FFT:SETCenter...
Page 333: Automatic Measurements
MEASurement<m>:SPECtrum:PEXCursion 8.2 Automatic measurements The R&S RTE can perform up to 8 automatic measurements and a quick measure- ment simultaneously. For each measurement, various measurement types are availa- ble to measure the characteristics of a source waveform. The measurement types are grouped in categories.
Page 334: Measurement Setup In General
Eye: eye diagram measurements ● Histogram: measurements on histograms ● Protocol: available for audio signals (option R&S RTE-K5) Protocol: advanced analysis (available if option R&S RTE-K35 is installed) Frequency domain ● Spectrum: measurements on spectrum waveforms ● Histogram: measurements on histograms Details on automatic measurements are described in the following chapters: ●...
Page 335: Configuring Measurements
® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements See: "To start a measurement with the [MEAS] key" on page 335. ● Using the "Meas" menu. See: Chapter 8.2.1.2, "Configuring measurements", on page 335. To start a measurement using the toolbar icon 1. Select the waveform that you want to measure. 2.
Page 336: General Measurement Settings
® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements 6. Optionally, define a gate to restrict the measurement to a part of the waveform. See Chapter 8.2.3.1, "Using measurement gates", on page 341. If you enabled the measurement with the toolbar icon and drew a rectangle on the diagram, the gate is already defined and enabled.
Page 337: Measurement Results
Eye: eye diagram measurements ● Histogram: measurements on histograms ● Protocol: available for audio signals (option R&S RTE-K5) Protocol: advanced analysis (available if option R&S RTE-K35 is installed) Frequency domain ● Spectrum: measurements on spectrum waveforms ● Histogram: measurements on histograms...
Page 338: Measurement Status
® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements If you want to save space in the display, drag the results to the signal bar. The most important results are displayed and updated in a results icon. The function "Clear all" in the "Display" menu resets all results including long-term measurement and statistic results, and also deletes all waveforms and the history.
Page 339: Configuring The Results Display
® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Icon Description No icon, no result The instrument cannot measure the required value, for example, if the acquisition value ("---") does not contain at least one complete period for frequency and cycle measure- ments. Check and adjust the waveform settings to get results. The measurement result might not be correct due to insufficient amplitude level.
Page 340: Display Settings For Results
® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements To clear the measurement results 1. On the "Display" menu, tap "Clear all". 2. To restart measurement statistics, without deleting other results, select "Reset" on the "Result Analysis" tab. The results in the selected measurement result box are cleared and written anew. 8.2.2.3 Display settings for results Display settings are specific for each measurement.
Page 341: Measurement Gates
® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Default position Defines the default position of the result table, when a new measurement is started: ● "Docked": fixed tab below the diagrams ● "Preview": result icon on the signal bar ● "Floating": floating result box in front of the diagrams Remote command: on page 1288 DISPlay:RESultboxes:MEPosition...
Page 342 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Result display settings are described in Chapter 8.2.2.3, "Display settings for results", on page 340. Use gate Considers the gating settings for the selected measurement and displays the gate. Remote command: on page 1302 MEASurement<m>:GATE[:STATe] Use gate coupling If you enable the gate coupling, the gate settings of the selected measurement are copied to all other measurements.
Page 343 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements (Relative) Start Defines the starting value for the gate. Remote command: on page 1322 CALCulate:MATH<m>:FFT:GATE:ABSolute:STARt on page 1323 CALCulate:MATH<m>:FFT:GATE:RELative:STARt on page 1303 MEASurement<m>:GATE:ABSolute:STARt on page 1303 MEASurement<m>:GATE:RELative:STARt on page 1380 SEARch:GATE:ABSolute:STARt on page 1380 SEARch:GATE:RELative:STARt (Relative) Stop Defines the end value for the gate.
Page 344: Reference Levels
● If fixed levels are defined for the DUT, you can configure the reference levels in the R&S RTE correspondingly and analyze the resulting measurement data. In manual configuration, the reference levels can be set relatively to defined signal lev- els or as absolute values.
Page 345: Configuring Reference Levels
® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements 8.2.4.1 Configuring reference levels To determine reference and signal levels automatically By default, the histogram of the measurement data is evaluated to determine the required levels automatically. However, you can define several parameters to adapt the evaluation to your data.
Page 346: Level Settings
® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements 3. Enable "Display result lines" or "Display reference levels" option, or both. The reference levels and intermediate results are displayed in the waveform dia- gram. 8.2.4.2 Level settings Access: "Meas" menu > "Reference Level" > "Levels" tab. On the "Levels"...
Page 347 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Figure 8-6: Manual reference level mode, relative level definition In manual reference level mode with absolute level definition, you define the absolute values of high and low signal levels, and the distances between reference and signal levels.
Page 348 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Remote command: Source is defined by suffix <m> in "REFLevel" subsystem, see Chapter 18.12.13, "Ref- erence levels", on page 1308 Reference level mode Defines whether the reference level is configured manually or automatically. Remote command: on page 1309 REFLevel<m>:LDETection Level definition...
Page 349: Amplitude/Time Measurements
® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Remote command: on page 1311 REFLevel<m>:ABSolute:LOW Middle The middle level between high and low signal level. The value is adjusted automati- cally if you change the high or low signal levels. Vice versa, if you change the middle level, the high and low signal levels are adjusted.
Page 350: Amplitude Measurements
® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements The R&S RTE provides various voltage, time, area and counting measurements in the category "Amp/Time". Some measurements require reference levels to be set accord- ing to the measurement purpose. Reference levels are explained in Chapter 8.2.4, "Reference levels",...
Page 351 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Meas. type Symbol Description/Result Peak to peak Peak-to-peak value of the waveform: the difference of maximum PkPk and minimum values Ampl Mean Arithmetic average of the waveform voltage values Mean  Eval  Mean Eval ...
Page 352: Time Measurements
® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Meas. type Symbol Description/Result Slew rate rising Steepness of the rising edge: voltage difference between the lower and higher reference level, divided by the rise time. Result in V/s = V*Hz (blue vertical lines in the picture below). Slew rate falling Steepness of the falling edge: voltage difference between the higher and lower reference level, divided by the fall time.
Page 353 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Meas. type Symbol Description/Result Pos. duty cycle Positive duty cycle: Width of a positive pulse in relation to the PosCyc period in %. The measurement requires at least one complete period of a triggered signal. Multiple measurements are possi- ble.
Page 354: Area Measurements
® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Meas. type Symbol Description/Result Setup Setup and Hold time measurement with positive and/or negative Setup clock edge. Hold Hold See: "Setup/Hold measurement settings" on page 357 Setup/Hold time Setup/Hold ratio / (T Setup/Hold ratio measurement with positive and/or negative Setup clock edge.
Page 355: Settings For Amplitude/Time Measurements
® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Table 8-4: Counting measurement types Meas. type Symbol Description/Result Pulse count The number of positive or negative pulses of the waveform, or of both positive and negative pulses. The mean value of the signal is determined. If the signal passes the mean value, an edge is counted.
Page 356 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements "Both" The upper and the lower envelope are used in measurements. For time measurements, the averages of min and max values are used, that is, the measurement is performed on the average waveform built from the upper and lower envelope. "Maximum"...
Page 357 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements "Slope" Sets the edge of each source, between which the delay is measured: positive, negative, or either of them. "Direction" Selects the direction for counting slopes for each source: from the beginning of the waveform, or from the end. "Number"...
Page 358 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Hold Setup Hold Setup Data Clock Clock slope = Positive Clock slope = Either If at least one of the setup/hold measurements is selected, more settings appear to specify the measurement. "Clock slope" Sets the edge of the clock from which the setup and hold times are measured: positive, negative, or either of them.
Page 359 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Pulse count Sets the number N of positive pulses for the "Pulse train" measurement. This measure- ment measures the duration of N positive pulses from the rising edge of the first pulse to the falling edge of the N-th pulse. Remote command: on page 1263 MEASurement<m>:AMPTime:PTCount...
Page 360: Measuring The Delay To Trigger
® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements "Edge slope" Sets the edge direction to be used for delay measurement: positive, negative, or either edge. "Level selec- Selects the reference level of the measurement source on which the tion" delay is measured: upper, middle, or lower level. Remote command: on page 1264 MEASurement<m>:AMPTime:DTOTrigger<n>:SLOPe...
Page 361: Eye Diagram Measurements
® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements 8.2.6 Eye diagram measurements The eye diagram is a tool for evaluation of signal quality and shows the combined effects of channel noise and intersymbol interference. It is a significant means of visu- alizing jitter and allows you to analyze the reasons for it. By creating histograms of the eye diagram, important jitter parameters can be determined.
Page 362 The extinction ratio is an indication of efficiency. It describes the ratio of the power used to transmit a logic level 1, to the energy used to trans- mit a logic level 0. The R&S RTE provides extinction ratio measure- ments as a percentage, and in decibels: ER (%) = Eye base / Eye top *100 Prerequisite: Eye base >...
Page 363: Settings For Eye Diagram Measurements
® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Meas. type Description/Result Eye amplitude Eye top - Eye base Jitter (peak to peak) Average of the jitter for both crossing points. Jitter = (σcrossing1 + σcrossing2) / 2 Jitter (6*σ) Jitter (6*σ) = Jitter * 6 6σ...
Page 364: Overview Of Spectrum Measurements
® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements 8.2.7.1 Overview of spectrum measurements Table 8-6: Spectrum measurements Meas. type Description, result Channel power Power integrated over the sample values defined by a center frequency and a bandwidth; based on a defined impedance. The result is given in dBm.
Page 365: Settings For Spectrum Measurements
Automatic measurements Meas. type Description, result THD_f, THD_a, These measurements require option R&S RTE-K18 Spectrum Analysis. THD_u, THD_r THD_f is the root mean square of the sum of all amplitudes of the har- Total harmonic distor- monic waves in relation to the amplitude at the fundamental frequency...
Page 366 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Figure 8-9: Parameters of channel power measurement N db down The threshold until which the samples to the left and right of the peak value are ana- lyzed to determine the "Bandwidth". Remote command: on page 1272 MEASurement<m>:SPECtrum:NDBDown Channel BW Bandwidth over which the channel power is calculated.
Page 367 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements This setting is only available for spectrum waveforms. It is valid for cursor measure- ments, spectrum measurements and peak search. The following figure shows a cursor measurement on a spectrum waveform: If "Peak excursion" is 30 dB, the peaks 1 to 5 are found. If "Peak excursion" is 20 dB, also the peaks 6 to 10 are found.
Page 368 1273 MEASurement<m>:SPECtrum:RESult<n>:MODE Result labels For peak lists only, requires option R&S RTE-K18: Use labels to describe the detected peaks in the spectrum diagram. You can configure what is displayed in the labels, and how they look like. User Manual 1326.1032.02 ─ 20...
Page 369: Histograms And Histogram Measurements
® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements "Enable" Displays a description for each detected peak in the spectrum dia- gram. "Frame type" Defines the layout of the labels (full border, underline, or none). "Invert" Displays black font on white background using the "Full border" frame type.
Page 370: Overview Of Histogram Measurements
® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements In a histogram, the maximum count of a waveform value is assigned to the full height (histogram peak). All other count values are displayed relative to the maximum. The following characteristic values can be determined for histograms (illustrated for a vertical histogram): 8.2.8.2 Overview of histogram measurements...
Page 371 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Table 8-7: Histogram measurements Meas. type Description/Result Waveform count The number of acquisitions (waveforms) the histogram is based on Waveform samples The number of samples from the most recent acquisition included in the current histogram Histogram samples The number of samples from all acquisitions included in the current his- togram...
Page 372: Creating Histograms
® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Meas. type Description/Result Mean ±σ The range between (mean value + standard deviation) and (mean value - standard deviation) σ Mean ±2*σ The range between (mean value + 3 * standard deviation) and (mean value - 2 * standard deviation) σ...
Page 373: Histogram Setup
® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements To create a histogram quickly with toolbar icons 1. Select the waveform for which you need a histogram. 2. Touch the histogram icon on the toolbar, and drag your finger down. Tap the "Verti- cal histogram" or the "Horizontal histogram" icon. 3.
Page 374 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Enable Enables or disables the histogram evaluation and display. The histogram settings are kept until the histogram is deleted. Source Defines the source of the histogram. Any analog channel waveform, math or reference waveform can be selected. Also measurements can serve as histogram source. In this case, the density distribution of the results of the main measurement is displayed.
Page 375: Settings For Histogram Measurement
® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Remote command: on page 1279 LAYout:HISTogram:HORZ:MODE on page 1281 LAYout:HISTogram:VERTical:MODE Horizontal start/stop value Defines the horizontal value range of the histogram. Remote command: on page 1280 LAYout:HISTogram:HORZ:ABSolute:STARt on page 1280 LAYout:HISTogram:HORZ:ABSolute:STOP on page 1280 LAYout:HISTogram:HORZ:RELative:STARt on page 1280 LAYout:HISTogram:HORZ:RELative:STOP Vertical start/stop value...
Page 376: Protocol Measurements (Option R&S Rte-K35)
If option R&S RTE-K35 is installed, enhanced measurements on the supported serial buses are possible. With it, you can measure various dependencies between the frames. Additional to option R&S RTE-K35 you need one of the following serial protocol options: ●...
Page 377: Settings For Protocol Measurements
® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Table 8-8: Protocol measurement types Meas. type Description / result Field value Value of a field over time Frame to frame The distance between two frames Trigger to frame The distance between a defined frame and the next trigger signal Measures a gap, period at which the bus is idle.
Page 378 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements The types of available frames and fields are depending on the enabled protocol. Table 8-9: Available protocol frames Protocol Frame Field Address 2. Addr Data MISO Word MOSI CAN/CAN FD Remote Data Data Overload WAKE Data Data RFFE...
Page 379 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Protocol Frame Field Ethernet Preamble Sleep Dest Len/Type Data Idle Triplet 100BASE-T1 Preamble Fill Dest Len/Type Data Idle Triplet Also, if a label list is loaded and enabled for the protocol, the symbolic label names can be selected from the "Frame"/"Field"...
Page 380 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements on page 1297 MEASurement<m>:PROTocol:F2FRame:VALFrom on page 1297 MEASurement<m>:PROTocol:F2FRame:VALTo Trigger to frame Opens a dialog to set up the parameters for the trigger to frame measurement. The types of available frames are depending on the enabled protocol, see Table 8-9.
Page 381 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements "Frame" Selects the type of frame. Selects the type of field. "Field" "Value" Sets a value for the selected field. "Field to be Selects the type of field which value is tracked over time. tracked" Remote command: on page 1298 MEASurement<m>:PROTocol:FLDValue:FLD...
Page 382: Result Analysis
® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements "Frame" Selects the type of frame. "Field" Selects the type of field. "Value" Sets a value for the selected field. Remote command: on page 1299 MEASurement<m>:PROTocol:MBITrate:FLD on page 1299 MEASurement<m>:PROTocol:MBITrate:FRM on page 1299 MEASurement<m>:PROTocol:MBITrate:VAL on page 1299 MEASurement<m>:PROTocol:SBITrate:FLD on page 1299 MEASurement<m>:PROTocol:SBITrate:FRM...
Page 383 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements ● Gate areas: restricting the waveform range for measurement can eliminate irregu- lar data, see Chapter 8.2.3, "Measurement gates", on page 341. ● Spectrum measurements: you can eliminate noise from the evaluation, see Threshold "Peak excursion" on page 332 ►...
Page 384 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Figure 8-11: Long-term measurement with statistics 1 = +Peak, maximum 2 = Average + standard deviation 3 = Average 2 = Average - standard deviation 1 = -Peak, minimum Stopping and starting the acquisition does not reset statistics but only stops and contin- ues them.
Page 385: Long-Term Measurements
® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements 8.2.10.2 Long-term measurements Long-term measurements show the behavior of measurement results over a longer time or for many samples. Therefore the measurement results of a specified time period are summarized into one long-term point. For each point, the current value mea- sured at the end of the time period is written to the long-term waveform.
Page 386: Track
® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements are are measured and included in the histogram. If the histogram is based on long- term measurement, it is shown in the long-term diagram. Figure 8-12: Statistical results and measurement histogram of an amplitude measurement See also: "Enable (Histogram)"...
Page 387: Settings For Result Analysis
® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Figure 8-13: Track on a frequency measurement Creating a track waveform 1. Configure the measurement. 2. Activate the measurement. 3. Select the "Result Analysis" tab. 4. Enable the track. See also: "Enable (Track)" on page 389. 8.2.10.5 Settings for result analysis Access: "Meas"...
Page 388 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Measurement for analysis / math Shows the selected measurement type, see also "Measurement type" on page 337. Statistics / Enable Enables the calculation and display of statistical results. Remote command: on page 1289 MEASurement<m>:STATistics[:ENABle] Enable (Long term) Enables long-term measurement of the main measurement.
Page 389 Measure all events in each acquisition. Before you can enable the track, activate the appropriate measurement. With option R&S RTE-K5 I²S audio signals, you can use the track for protocol mea- surements on decoded audio buses, see Chapter 13.8.5, "Track", on page 651.
Page 390: Horizontal Long-Term Scaling
In this dialog box, you define the horizontal scale of long-term measurement diagrams. The length of the long-term measurement is defined by the number of points. If option R&S RTE-K5 I²S Audio Signals is installed, the trend diagram is configured here.
Page 391 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Scale mode Defines when the points of a long-term measurement are created. If statistics are enabled, each long-term measurement point shows the statistical mean and standard deviation of the results measured during the defined period. If statistics are disabled, the first measurement result of each period is taken as long- term measurement point.
Page 392: Limit And Margin Checks
® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements 8.2.11 Limit and margin checks Limit and margin checks evaluate whether the measurement result exceeds a specified value. Violations are indicated by icons in the result box. Furthermore, you can define actions that are performed on limit or margin violation, like saving the waveform or measurement results.
Page 393 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements If the check is enabled, a table is displayed where you can set the limit and margin val- ues and the range of valid measurement results. Limit check Selects and enables the limit or margin check. "Off"...
Page 394: Actions On Limit Check Results
® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Limits are stricter than the margins for the value check. Thus, the margins must be within the valid range. If necessary, the limit and margin values are adapted according to the selected valid range. The settings are only visible if "Limit check" is enabled. Remote command: on page 1265 MEASurement<m>:AMPTime:LCHeck<n>:LOWer:LIMit...
Page 395 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Remote command: on page 1306 MEASurement<m>:ONViolation:BEEP Stop acq Stops data acquisition on violation. Remote command: on page 1306 MEASurement<m>:ONViolation:ACQStop Print Prints a screenshot including the measurement results to the printer defined in the "Print" dialog box (see Chapter 12.4.2, "Printing screenshots", on page 506).
Page 396: Quick Measurements
® Measurements R&S Quick measurements 8.3 Quick measurements Quick measurement performs a set of up to eight amplitude/time measurements on one source, simply by tapping the "Quick measurement" toolbar icon. The results are displayed in a results box. You can configure the measurement type to be included in quick measurement.
Page 397 ® Measurements R&S Quick measurements 4. Tap the "Main measurement" button. 5. Select the measurement that you want to use for long-term and histogram analysis. 6. Tap "Activate". Select a measurement that you want to add to the quick measure- ment.
Page 398: Spectrum Analysis
FFTs per capture by dividing one capture into several segments, or frames. Thus, the R&S RTE can visualize how the frequency content of a signal changes over time which helps to detect intermittent or sporadic signal details. Further- more, the R&S RTE allows consecutive frames to overlap.
Page 399 ® Spectrum analysis R&S FFT analysis The overlapping factor can be set freely. The higher the overlap factor, the more frames are used. This leads to more individual results and improves detection of transi- ent signal effects. However, it also extends the duration of the calculation. The size of the frame depends on the number of input signal values (record length), the overlap factor, and the FFT size (number of samples used for FFT calculation).
Page 400 ® Spectrum analysis R&S FFT analysis Gate length Gate position Gate t[s] Center frequency f[Hz] Frequency span Restricting the result range You can restrict the results of the FFT analysis to a specified frequency range. The fre- quency range can be defined in two ways: ●...
Page 401 "Unwrap" function. Dependencies between FFT parameters FFT analysis in the R&S RTE is highly configurable. Several parameters, including the resolution bandwidth, frequency span and center frequency, can be defined according to your requirements. Note, however, that several parameters are correlated and not all can be configured independently of the others.
Page 402: Configuring Spectrum Waveforms
® Spectrum analysis R&S FFT analysis ● FFT -dφ*df (group delay): the negative derivative of the phase with respect to fre- quency; useful to measure phase distortion 9.1.2 Configuring spectrum waveforms During FFT analysis, a signal in the time domain is converted to a spectrum of frequen- cies.
Page 403 ® Spectrum analysis R&S FFT analysis 6. Select the source channel. 7. Close the parenthesis. 8. Tap "Enter" To configure the spectrum of FFT analysis By default, a suitable frequency range for the expected horizontal values according to the resolution bandwidth is selected, in respect to performance and precision. Span and RBW settings are coupled.
Page 404 ® Spectrum analysis R&S FFT analysis 8. If you use an arithmetic mode, increase the "Overlap factor" for neighboring seg- ments to increase the accuracy of the results. To restrict the input values (gating) By default, the FFT is calculated for the entire record length as defined for the data acquisition.
Page 405: Fft Configuration Settings
In this tab, you define the settings for the FFT window. The display can be restricted to the results for a certain time base extract and to a specified frequency range. Additional settings are available on this tab if the Spectrum Analysis option (R&S RTE- K18) is installed.
Page 406 If activated, a diagram for the defined math waveform is displayed on the touch screen. Remote command: on page 1227 CALCulate:MATH<m>:STATe Frequency axis (R&S RTE-K18 only) Defines the scaling method for the frequency (x-) axis of the spectrogram. "Logarithmic" Logarithmic scaling "Linear Unit"...
Page 407 ® Spectrum analysis R&S FFT analysis Center frequency Defines the position of the displayed frequency range, which is (Center - Span/2) to (Center + Span/2). The width of the range is defined using the "Frequency span" set- ting. Remote command: on page 1317 CALCulate:MATH<m>:FFT:CFRequency Frequency span...
Page 408 Various different window functions are provided in the R&S RTE to suit different input signals. Each of the window functions has specific characteristics, including some advantages and some trade-offs. Consider these characteristics carefully, to find the optimum solution for the measurement task.
Page 409: Fft Overlap
® Spectrum analysis R&S FFT analysis If this option is disabled, the preset color of the selected channel source is displayed, and the intensity of the specific signal color varies according to the cumulative occur- rence of the values. For spectrum diagrams, this setting corresponds to the common waveform display.
Page 410: Fft Gating
Determines the minimum result for each input value from the data of the current acquisition and the acquisitions before. Only available if option R&S RTE-K18 is installed. "MaxHold" Determines the maximum result for each input value from the data of the current acquisition and the acquisitions before.
Page 411: Enable Math Signal
® Spectrum analysis R&S FFT analysis If no gate is used, you can define the record length as dependent on the RBW, or the RBW as dependent on the record length (which is defined by the acquisition time). Enable math signal......................411 Gate........................
Page 412: Use Gate
® Spectrum analysis R&S FFT analysis Use Gate Enables FFT gating and shows the gate. If enabled, the "Gate Definition" settings are used. If disabled, the relation between the record length and the RBW can be defined man- ually instead. When a gate is used, the RBW is adapted, if necessary.
Page 413: Peak List
® Spectrum analysis R&S FFT analysis on page 1380 SEARch:GATE:ABSolute:STARt on page 1380 SEARch:GATE:RELative:STARt (Relative) Stop ← Gate Definition Defines the end value for the gate. Remote command: on page 1323 CALCulate:MATH<m>:FFT:GATE:ABSolute:STOP on page 1323 CALCulate:MATH<m>:FFT:GATE:RELative:STOP on page 1303 MEASurement<m>:GATE:ABSolute:STOP on page 1303 MEASurement<m>:GATE:RELative:STOP on page 1380...
Page 414 ® Spectrum analysis R&S FFT analysis Enable math signal......................414 Magnitude unit......................414 Reference level......................415 Vertical scaling mode (Manual/Auto)................415 Vertical range......................415 Range..........................415 Phase unit........................415 Unwrap........................415 Suppression........................ 416 Threshold........................416 Enable math signal If activated, a diagram for the defined math waveform is displayed on the touch screen. Remote command: on page 1227 CALCulate:MATH<m>:STATe...
Page 415 ® Spectrum analysis R&S FFT analysis "dBHz, dBkHz, dBMHz, dBGz" Logarithmic scaling; related to frequency. "dBA, dBmA, μdBA" Logarithmic scaling; related to current. Remote command: on page 1325 CALCulate:MATH<m>:FFT:MAGNitude:SCALe Reference level Defines the reference level for dB scaling. Remote command: on page 1324 CALCulate:MATH<m>:FFT:MAGNitude:LEVel Vertical scaling mode (Manual/Auto)
Page 416: Fft Coupling
® Spectrum analysis R&S FFT analysis Suppression Enables noise suppression. Phase calculation is restricted to frequencies with a mini- mum magnitude, the threshold value. Remote command: on page 1326 CALCulate:MATH<m>:FFT:PHASe:SUPPression Threshold Defines the minimum frequency magnitude for which phases are calculated. This set- ting is only available if "Suppression"...
Page 417: Spectrum Analysis (Option R&S Rte-K18)
1327 CALCulate:MATH<m>:FFT:COUPled:WITH<1..8> 9.2 Spectrum Analysis (option R&S RTE-K18) This chapter describes the Spectrum Analysis option R&S RTE-K18. 9.2.1 Spectrogram display The Spectrum Analysis option provides a new diagram for spectrum waveforms: a spectrogram. When you enable a spectrogram, three windows are displayed: the power vs.
Page 418: Spectrum Analysis Functions
® Spectrum analysis R&S Spectrum Analysis (option R&S RTE-K18) A spectrogram shows how the spectral density of a signal varies over time. The x-axis shows the frequency, the y-axis shows the time. A third dimension, the power level, is indicated by different colors. Thus you can see how the strength of the signal varies over time for different frequencies.
Page 419: Configuring Spectrograms
323. 9.2.3 Configuring spectrograms Spectrograms are only available if the Spectrum Analysis option R&S RTE-K18 is acti- vated. 1. Tap the "Spectrogram" icon on the toolbar. 2. On the signal bar, select the source of the spectrogram.
Page 420: Spectrogram Configuration Settings
5. To view a different waveform from the spectrogram, move the time lines in the spectrogram. 9.2.4 Spectrogram configuration settings Access: [MATH] > "FFT Setup" Spectrograms are only available if the option R&S RTE-K18 is activated. Furthermore, a math (FFT) waveform must be configured and enabled. Chapter 9.1.2, "Configuring spectrum waveforms", on page 402.
Page 421 ® Spectrum analysis R&S Spectrum Analysis (option R&S RTE-K18) You can enable and display two time lines at the same time. This allows you to com- pare the results at different times. The position of the time line is defined by the index of the data acquisition in the his- tory.
Page 422: Mask Testing
"mask", which is laid over the input signal in the display. Thus you can easily detect where the signal violates the mask. Mask testing with R&S RTE has only a minor impact on the acquisition rate, thus mask violations are detected fast and reliably.
Page 423 ® Mask testing R&S About mask testing Acq. completed Number of tested acquisitions. Remote command: on page 1349 MTESt:RESult:COUNt:WAVeforms? Acq. remaining Remaining acquisitions until "Average count / Nx Single count" is reached. The value is useful if you test a specified number of acquisitions with action "Stop acquisition"...
Page 424: Mask Test Settings
® Mask testing R&S Mask test settings Remote command: on page 1351 MTESt:RESult:FRATe? Test result A test has failed if the number of sample hits or acquisition hits exceeds the limit of "Violation tolerance" hits. Remote command: on page 1349 MTESt:RESult[:RESult]? 10.2 Mask test settings 10.2.1 Test definition...
Page 425 ® Mask testing R&S Mask test settings Enable test Activates and deactivates the mask test. If the acquisition is running, the test starts immediately. Otherwise, the test starts when acquisition is started. The testing is stopped when acquisition is stopped, or if a stop action is configured with "Stop acq."...
Page 426: Mask Definition
Save / load mask test Provides all functions to store and recall a mask test. The mask definition, defined actions and fail conditions are stored in an R&S RTE-specific .xml file. "Open" Opens a dialog box where you can select the file name.
Page 427 ® Mask testing R&S Mask test settings Alternatively, you can set the corner points on the touch screen and adjust the values in the "Mask Definition" tab. To save the mask, select the "Test Definition" tab and save the mask test. Settings overview: Make sure that the correct "Mask Test"...
Page 428 ® Mask testing R&S Mask test settings ● Append a new segment at the end of the list. ● Remove the selected mask segment from the list. ● Select the region that builds the mask. – Inner region: the segment points form a closed geometrical shape, which is the mask segment.
Page 429: Mask Definition: Waveform Mask
® Mask testing R&S Mask test settings Factor X ← Rescale Stretches or compresses the selected mask segment in horizontal direction. The x-val- ues of all points of the selected mask segment are multiplied with this factor. Factors >1 stretch the mask segment, while factors between 0 and 1 compress it. Negative val- ues are possible and change the algebraic sign.
Page 430 ® Mask testing R&S Mask test settings Figure 10-1: Waveform mask Settings overview: Common settings: ● "Definition Type" on page 425 ● "Source" on page 425 Create mask Creates the upper and lower mask limit from the selected reference waveform. If the reference waveform was not defined before, it is created automatically from the mask test "Source"...
Page 431 ® Mask testing R&S Mask test settings Used reference Sets the reference waveform from which the mask is created. The reference waveform can be created before with "Reference Waveform Setup", or loaded from a file in the lower part of the dialog box. If the reference waveform was not defined before mask definition, it is created automatically from the mask test "Source"...
Page 432: Event Actions /Reset
® Mask testing R&S Mask test settings Vertical stretch Sets the vertical scaling to stretch the mask in y-direction. The scaling axis is the hori- zontal line through the lowest value of the lower mask limit. Values > 100% stretch the mask, and values <...
Page 433 ® Mask testing R&S Mask test settings The settings in this tab define what happens when the mask test has failed or when it has passed successfully. Furthermore, you can reset all totals and results in the "Mask Test" result boxes. Most actions can be initiated either on failure or on success: ●...
Page 434 ® Mask testing R&S Mask test settings Remote command: on page 1344 MTESt:ONViolation:STOP Print Prints a screenshot including the mask test results to the printer defined in the "Print" dialog box (see Printer). Remote command: on page 1344 MTESt:ONViolation:PRINt Save Wfm Saves the failed waveform as a reference waveform to the file specified in [FILE] >...
Page 435: Mask Display
® Mask testing R&S Mask test settings 10.2.4 Mask display Access: [MASKS] > "Mask Display" The "Mask Display" tab contains all settings for mask and hit display. Show mask Switches the display of all mask segments on or off. Show labels Switches the display of the mask test name on or off.
Page 436: Working With Masks
® Mask testing R&S Working with masks Color Sets the color of samples that violated the mask. Remote command: on page 1347 MTESt:COLor:MATCh Mask without violation Sets the color of masks segments that were not hit. Remote command: on page 1347 MTESt:COLor:UNMatch Mask with violation Sets the color of mask segments the signal has entered into.
Page 437: Modifying User Masks
® Mask testing R&S Working with masks You can combine both methods. For example, at first you enter the mask quickly on the touchscreen, and then modify the point coordinates with precise values. To create a mask graphically on the touch screen 1.
Page 438 ® Mask testing R&S Working with masks With the graphical method, you can: ● Move, add, and delete segments ● Move and delete points Adding points to an existing segment graphically is not possible. With the numerical method, in the "Mask Definition" tab, you have all modification pos- sibilities.
Page 439 ® Mask testing R&S Working with masks To move a point on the touch screen 1. Tap the mask segment that you want to change. 2. Drag&drop the point to the new position. 3. Tap outside the mask to deselect the mask segment. To change the mask definition numerically The settings mentioned here are described in detail in Chapter 10.2.2.1, "Mask defini-...
Page 440: Setting Up A Mask Test
® Mask testing R&S Working with masks d) To move the selected point, change the X- and Y-values. To rescale and move a mask segment The settings mentioned here are described in detail in Chapter 10.2.2.1, "Mask defini- tion: user mask", on page 426.
Page 441: Configuring The Mask And Hit Display
® Mask testing R&S Working with masks 4. Set the conditions for a failed test: a) Fail condition: select if sample hits or the number of acquisitions with sample hits are considered. b) Violation tolerance: number of tolerable sample hits or acquisition hits. A test has failed if the number of sample hits or acquisition hits exceeds the limit of violation tolerance hits.
Page 442: Running A Mask Test
® Mask testing R&S Working with masks 10.3.4 Running a mask test Before you can start a mask test, make sure that the mask setup is complete: ● The mask is defined, see Chapter 10.3.1.1, "Creating user masks", on page 436 Chapter 10.3.1.2, "Modifying user masks", on page 437.
Page 443: Saving And Loading Masks
® Mask testing R&S Working with masks Note: If you run the acquisition with [RUN CONT], the state of the mask test is set to "Finished" when this number of acquisitions has been captured but the mask testing continues until the acquisition is stopped. 10.3.5 Saving and loading masks Mask test definitions remain on the instrument until they are changed or deleted, or [PRESET] is performed.
Page 444 ® Mask testing R&S Working with masks 3. In the quick-access "History" dialog box, tap "Play". The mask testing is performed on the complete history memory, starting with the oldest acquisition. The state of the mask test is set to "Finished" when "Nx Single count"...
Page 445: Search Functions
® Search functions R&S Overview: search definition and results 11 Search functions Search functions allow you to detect and analyze specific events in the acquired data quickly and simply. You can search in various waveforms for several events at once. The search area can be limited by a gate.
Page 446: Search Results
® Search functions R&S Overview: search definition and results ● Result presentation For each search, you define how the search results are displayed: in a result table and/or in a search zoom window. ● Noise rejection Hysteresis for the selected source is defined for each search separately, in abso- lute or relative values.
Page 447: Search Setup
® Search functions R&S Search setup Enabling the search zoom window disables the search, stops a running acquisition, and displays the search results of the last acquisition in the zoom window. Navigating search results If a search zoom window has been opened, it shows the first result that was found. ►...
Page 448: Search Criteria
® Search functions R&S Search setup The search setup includes the source selection, the selection of search events (crite- ria), event-specific search conditions, and search control. 11.2.1 Search criteria Access: [SEARCH] > "Setup" tab Enable If you enable a search and run an acquisition, the search is performed continuously on the acquired data until acquisition is stopped.
Page 449 ® Search functions R&S Search setup Source Defines the waveform to be searched. The source can be any analog and digital input signal, math or reference waveform, or track. While the instrument triggers only on real input signals, it can search also calculated and restored waveforms. If the source is an FFT spectrum, you can perform a frequency marker search by using the cursor measurement and defining the peak excursion.
Page 450: Search Parameters
® Search functions R&S Search setup on page 1355 SEARch:TRIGger:DATatoclock:ACOPy on page 1355 SEARch:TRIGger:STATe:ACOPy on page 1355 SEARch:TRIGger:PATTern:ACOPy 11.2.2 Search parameters Most parameters available for trigger event definition can also be configured as search conditions. Each event type is defined in a separate subtab. If the source is a spectrum, the instrument performs a frequency marker search.
Page 451: Glitch
® Search functions R&S Search setup Remote command: on page 1355 SEARch:TRIGger:LEVel[:VALue] 11.2.2.2 Glitch The glitch search works the same way as the glitch trigger. To apply the trigger settings to search, tap Copy 'A Trigger'. The glitch search is not available if the search source is a digital channel. Polarity, Range, Width See trigger settings: ●...
Page 452: Runt
® Search functions R&S Search setup Polarity, Range, Width, ±Delta See trigger settings: ● "Polarity" on page 246 While the width trigger can only analyze positive or negative polarity, searching for a width is also possible for both polarities at the same time ("Either"). ●...
Page 453: Window
® Search functions R&S Search setup Polarity, Range, Runt width, ±Delta Time limit for the runt, see trigger settings: ● "Polarity" on page 245 ● "Range" on page 248 ● "Runt width" on page 248 ● "±Delta" on page 248 Remote command: on page 1359 SEARch:TRIGger:RUNT:POLarity...
Page 454: Timeout
® Search functions R&S Search setup Vertical condition Defines the run of the signal relative to the window, see "Vertical condition" on page 249. Remote command: on page 1367 SEARch:TRIGger:WINDow:RANGe Time condition, Width, ±Delta Set the time limit for the vertical condition, see: ●...
Page 455: Interval
® Search functions R&S Search setup Trigger level Sets the voltage level for trigger search. The value is used for all search event types that require one trigger level. The search trigger level is search-specific, you can define different levels in different searches for the same event. Remote command: on page 1355 SEARch:TRIGger:LEVel[:VALue]...
Page 456: Slew Rate
® Search functions R&S Search setup 11.2.2.8 Slew rate The slew rate search settings are the same as the slew rate trigger settings. To apply the trigger settings to search, tap Copy 'A Trigger'. The slew rate search is not available if the search source is a digital channel. Polarity, Range, Slew rate, ±Delta ●...
Page 457: State
® Search functions R&S Search setup Clock source, Clock edge, Clock level Set the clock settings. Both "Clock level" and "Clock edge" define the starting point for calculation of the setup and hold time. Remote command: on page 1370 SEARch:TRIGger:DATatoclock:CSOurce on page 1369 SEARch:TRIGger:DATatoclock:CEDGe on page 1370...
Page 458: Pattern
® Search functions R&S Search setup Clock source, Clock edge Define the clock settings. The clock signal is the waveform to be searched. Remote command: on page 1376 SEARch:TRIGger:STATe:CSOurce on page 1376 SEARch:TRIGger:STATe:CEDGe on page 1376 SEARch:TRIGger:STATe:CLEVel State pattern State settings are the same as for the state trigger. See also "Pattern"...
Page 459: Frequency Marker Search
® Search functions R&S Search setup Remote command: on page 1372 SEARch:TRIGger:PATTern:A[:ENABle] on page 1372 SEARch:TRIGger:PATTern:A:LOGic on page 1373 SEARch:TRIGger:PATTern:AB:LOGic on page 1373 SEARch:TRIGger:PATTern:ABCD:LOGic Timing condition: Mode, Range, Time, Width, ±Delta Additional time limitation to the pattern, see "Additional settings: Timing" on page 257.
Page 460 ® Search functions R&S Search setup 3. Tap the diagram with the waveform to be searched, or drag a rectangle on the dia- gram to define the search area. The default edge search is configured as "Search<x>" and performed. The "Search Results"...
Page 461: Search Gate
® Search functions R&S Search gate Note: A-event copy, gating and noise reject are not available for search on serial buses. 11.3 Search gate The gate defines the search area within the source waveform. You can use absolute or relative values to define the gate, or couple it to a previously defined zoom area. 11.3.1 Gate settings Access: [SEARCH] >...
Page 462 ® Search functions R&S Search gate "Relative" The gate's start and stop values are defined by a percentage of the value range. Remote command: on page 1323 CALCulate:MATH<m>:FFT:GATE:MODE on page 1303 MEASurement<m>:GATE:MODE on page 1379 SEARch:GATE:MODE (Relative) Start Defines the starting value for the gate. Remote command: on page 1322 CALCulate:MATH<m>:FFT:GATE:ABSolute:STARt...
Page 463: Defining The Search Gate
® Search functions R&S Result presentation If several cursor measurements are enabled, select the cursor set to be used for gat- ing. The "Start" and "Stop" values of the gate are adjusted to the values of the cursor line positions. The measurement is limited to the part of the waveform between the cur- sor lines.
Page 464 ® Search functions R&S Result presentation Result table These settings refer to the search result table. Show result table ← Result table Displays or hides the search result table. Remote command: on page 1388 SEARch:RESult:SHOW Sort mode ← Result table Sorts the search results by x-value position or value of the result.
Page 465 ® Search functions R&S Result presentation If "Auto clear" is disabled, the first result of each acquisition is listed until the maximum number of entries in the table is reached. Clear results Clears the search results once and starts a new search. Remote command: on page 1352 SEARch:CLEar...
Page 466: Configuring The Search Results Presentation
® Search functions R&S Result presentation Horizontal ← Search zoom window Defines whether absolute or relative values are used to specify the x-axis values. Remote command: on page 1213 LAYout:ZOOM:HORZ:MODE on page 1385 SEARch:RESDiagram:HORZ:MODE Position / Relative position (horizontal) ← Search zoom window Defines the x-value of the centerpoint of the zoom area.
Page 467: Noise Reject
® Search functions R&S Noise reject This stops a running search and a running acquisition. The zoom area is indicated in the diagram that displays the source waveform of the search. The zoom window is displayed for the first result that was found. 2.
Page 468: Defining Noise Rejection For Searches
® Search functions R&S Noise reject Remote command: on page 1383 SEARch:TRIGger:LEVel:NOISe[:STATe] Hysteresis mode Defines whether values absolute or relative to the vertical scaling are used. Remote command: on page 1382 SEARch:TRIGger:LEVel:NOISe:MODE Relative / Absolute hysteresis Defines a range in absolute or relative values around the search level. If the signal jit- ters inside this range and crosses the level, no search event is detected.
Page 469: Data And File Management
® Data and file management R&S Save and recall user settings 12 Data and file management This chapter describes how to manage instrument settings, and measurement results like waveform data, numeric results and screenshots. The "Save/Recall" dialog provides functions for saving and restoring data on the instru- ment.
Page 470 ® Data and file management R&S Save and recall user settings Figure 12-1: Save tab Access to load instrument settings: [FILE] key > "Recall" tab > "User settings" User Manual 1326.1032.02 ─ 20...
Page 471: Savesets
Data and file management R&S Save and recall user settings Figure 12-2: Recall tab The R&S RTE provides the following types of saving and restoring settings: ● Savesets contain the complete instrument and measurement configuration except for user-specific display settings.
Page 472: Save Saveset Settings
® Data and file management R&S Save and recall user settings 12.1.1.1 Save saveset settings Access: [FILE] key > "Save" tab > "Savesets" Save to file Enter the file name to save the setting data to, and select the file format with the format button on the right.
Page 473: One File
® Data and file management R&S Save and recall user settings Load from file Enter the file name to load the setting data from, and select the file format with the for- mat button on the right. Double-tap the file name to open the file selection dialog box. See also: Chapter 12.7, "File selection dialog",...
Page 474: Load One File Settings
® Data and file management R&S Save and recall user settings 12.1.2.2 Load One File settings Access: [FILE] key > "Recall" tab > "One File" Load from file Select "Open" to open the file selection dialog box, and to select the required file. See also: Chapter 12.7, "File selection dialog",...
Page 475 ® Data and file management R&S Save and recall user settings 1. On the toolbar, tap the "Graphical Recall " icon. A window opens and shows the screenshot of the first measurement configuration that is stored in the default directory. 2.
Page 476: Saving And Loading Settings
Tap "Open" to navigate to a different file. Select the file from the file selection dialog box and tap "Select". The saved settings are loaded to the R&S RTE. To save a One File 1. If you want to save reference waveforms in the One File, create and display the reference waveforms.
Page 477: Waveform Data And Results
Tap "Open" to navigate to a different file. Select the file from the file selection dialog box and tap "Select". The saved settings and reference waveforms are loaded to the R&S RTE. 12.2 Waveform data and results Access: [FILE] > "Save" tab...
Page 478: Waveform Export Files
® Data and file management R&S Waveform data and results You can export various data to file: waveform data, histograms, and measurement results. ● Waveform export files................... 478 ● Waveforms - export settings................. 485 ● Waveform histogram..................... 490 ● Numeric Results....................492 ●...
Page 479 Header files contain the following properties: Table 12-1: Header file properties Value Description General FirmwareVersion Firmware version that is installed on the R&S RTE (last entry in the header file) Source Name of the exported waveform Resolution Time between two samples...
Page 480 ® Data and file management R&S Waveform data and results Value Description SignalRecordLength Number of required samples in the waveform. The value can differ from RecordLength and HWRecordLength if the source is, for example, a spectrum, a bus signal, a correlation or a measurement. The value is determined automatically considering the waveform parameters and their dependencies.
Page 481 ® Data and file management R&S Waveform data and results Value Description NofQuantisationLevels Theoretical number of quantization levels in the signal. This value depends on the waveform format (8 bit, 16 bit, …). In case of a math waveform, it depends on the quantization levels of the operands and on the operator type.
Page 482: Waveform Data Files
® Data and file management R&S Waveform data and results Value Description FreqSpan Frequency span of the spectrum FrequencyStart Start frequency of the spectrum FrequencyStop Stop frequency of the spectrum WindowType Window used for the spectrum computation ResolutionBW Resolution bandwidth of the spectrum AdjustedResolutionBW Actual resolution bandwidth of a spectrum waveform.
Page 483 ® Data and file management R&S Waveform data and results – Envelope waveform: Ymin ; Ymax ; Ymin ; Ymax ; Ymin ; Ymax ; Ymin ; Ymax ; ... – Normal waveform, interleaved x/y data: ; ... – Envelope waveform, interleaved x/y data: ;Ymin ;...
Page 484: Number Of Samples In The Waveform Data File
No of trailing additional samples = No of additional samples - LeadingSettlingSamples = SignalHardwareRecordLength - SignalRecordLength - LeadingSettlingSamples MSO option R&S RTE-B1: If the data of digital channels is stored in BIN format, 1 bit is written for each sample. 8 data samples are written in 1 byte (data word).
Page 485: Waveforms - Export Settings
Selects the waveform to be exported if "Multichannel export" is disabled. Active waveforms of input channels, math signals and reference waveforms are availa- ble for export. If the MSO option R&S RTE-B1 is installed, you can save also digital channels and parallel buses. Remote command:...
Page 486 ® Data and file management R&S Waveform data and results You can reload exported multiple channels if they are stored in BIN format. The import asks you to assign each stored waveform to a reference waveform. Remote command: on page 1402 EXPort:WAVeform:MULTichannel Selected sources Select the channels to be included in data export if "Multi-channel export"...
Page 487 ® Data and file management R&S Waveform data and results If multiple acquisitions of one waveform are exported into a BIN file, the first acquisition can be reloaded as reference waveform. "Data logging" enables the export of all waveforms of an Nx Single acquisition into one file.
Page 488 ® Data and file management R&S Waveform data and results To save several subsequent history waveforms, enable "Multiple Wfms" and define the range of the waveforms to be saved using "Start acq" and "Stop acq". These range settings are also available in the "History" dialog box. Start the history replay and simultaneous saving with "Start Export".
Page 489 ® Data and file management R&S Waveform data and results Remote command: on page 1402 EXPort:WAVeform:NAME on page 1403 EXPort:WAVeform:SAVE Interleaved x/y Includes horizontal values in the export data (time or frequency values, depending on the waveform). X and Y-values are written alternately to the file. If disabled, only Y-val- ues - mostly voltage values - are written.
Page 490: Waveform Histogram
® Data and file management R&S Waveform data and results Remote command: on page 1406 EXPort:WAVeform:RAW Byte order Sets the endianess for INT16 data: ● LSB first: little endian, least significant byte first ● MSB first: big endian, most significant byte first Remote command: on page 1083 FORMat:BORDer...
Page 491 By default, the filename has the prefix "Histogram_". You can define a pattern for auto- matic naming in the "Autonaming" tab. The default directory is: C:\Users\Public\Documents\Rohde-Schwarz\RTE\Histograms "Save" Saves the histogram data in the selected file.
Page 492: Numeric Results
® Data and file management R&S Waveform data and results Remote command: on page 1408 EXPort:HISTogram:NAME on page 1408 EXPort:HISTogram:SAVE on page 1408 EXPort:HISTogram:DATA? Histogram source, Horizontal range, Vertical range Show the source and the limits of the histogram area for information. The ranges are set in the "Histogram"...
Page 493: Result Analysis
® Data and file management R&S Waveform data and results Note: If the result box is minimized, only the columns shown on the result icon are saved (2 columns). Statistical results are not shown on the minimized results icon, and they are not saved.
Page 494 ® Data and file management R&S Waveform data and results The measurement export saves results in two files. The *.Wfm.* file contains data values, and the other file is the header file. The header file contains: ● Source waveform of the measurement ●...
Page 495 By default, the filename has the prefix "Measurement_". You can define a pattern for automatic naming in the "Autonaming" tab. The default directory is: C:\Users\Public\Documents\Rohde-Schwarz\RTE\Measurements "Save" Saves the measurement data in the selected file. "Save As..."...
Page 496: Csv Export
.bin file. The data export of several channels into one file is also possible. Files in .bin format can be reloaded to the R&S RTE as reference waveforms. Instead of a complete waveform, you can also save a part of it, limited by a previously defined zoom, cursor lines, measurement gate or user-defined time values.
Page 497 ® Data and file management R&S Waveform data and results For details on waveform save/recall settings, see Chapter 12.2.2, "Waveforms - export settings", on page 485. The following procedures are described: ● "To save a waveform or a part of a waveform to a file" on page 497 ●...
Page 498: Autonaming
® Data and file management R&S Autonaming To export waveform data of a running acquisition 1. Select the waveforms to be saved and the scope as described in "To save a wave- form or a part of a waveform to a file" on page 497, step 1 to 5.
Page 499: Autonaming Settings
® Data and file management R&S Autonaming 12.3.1 Autonaming settings In this tab, you can define the pattern for automatic file name generation. This name is used as the default file name. The default path is the storage location for all saved files and their subdirectories.
Page 500 ® Data and file management R&S Autonaming Remote command: on page 1398 MMEMory:AUTonaming:PREFix User text (enable) If enabled, inserts the specified user text after the prefix. Remote command: on page 1398 MMEMory:AUTonaming:USERtext Text input User-defined text to be inserted after the prefix. Remote command: on page 1398 MMEMory:AUTonaming:TEXT...
Page 501: Defining Default File Paths And Names
® Data and file management R&S Screenshots 12.3.2 Defining default file paths and names When a save or load operation is performed, a default file name and path is provided. You can configure which path is used and how the file name is generated. In the file selection dialog box, you can change the folder and name as desired.
Page 502: Screenshot Settings
Screenshots on a computer using the Web interface If the R&S RTE is connected to a LAN, you can create and save screenshots of the instrument's display on a computer. See Chapter 17.3.2, "Web browser",...
Page 503 The instrument firmware uses the Windows printer configu- ration, no additional printer setup is required. To make a printer available for R&S RTE, add and configure it in the Windows operating system: "Settings" > "Devices" > " Print- ers and scanners".
Page 504 ® Data and file management R&S Screenshots Depending on the printer driver, printing to a file is also possible. By default, the Rohde & Schwarz printer drivers for BMP, JPG, PDF, PNG, and TIFF files are installed. Remote command: on page 1417 SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:SELect<1..2>...
Page 505 ® Data and file management R&S Screenshots "White background" "Inverse color" Background Waveform and results White Screen colors White Inverted colors Black Inverted colors Black Screen colors Remote command: on page 1415 HCOPy:WBKG Inverse color Inverts the colors of the output, i.e. a dark waveform is shown on a white background. See also: "White background"...
Page 506: Printing Screenshots
® Data and file management R&S Screenshots Remote command: on page 1413 HCOPy:DEVice<m>:LANGuage on page 1412 HCOPy:DESTination<1..2> on page 1413 MMEMory:NAME on page 1416 HCOPy:IMMediate<m>[:DUM] on page 1416 HCOPy:IMMediate<m>:NEXT on page 1394 MMEMory:DELete 12.4.2 Printing screenshots You can configure the format and colors used for printing, and edit the image. 1.
Page 507: Reports
® Data and file management R&S Reports 3. Select the file format: png, jpg, or another one. 4. To change the directory, tap "Save As" and configure the path. The symbols of often used target folders are listed on the left of the file explorer. By default, screenshots are saved in the C:\Users\Public\Public Documents\Rohde-Schwarz\RTx\ ScreenShots directory.
Page 508: Report Settings
® Data and file management R&S Reports Before, add the icon to the toolbar, see also Chapter 3.4.7.2, "Configuring the tool- bar", on page 119. ● Action on micro button, available on active Rohde & Schwarz probes ● Action on trigger ●...
Page 509: Preset Setup
® Data and file management R&S Preset setup Show Preview Opens the current report in PDF format. User name / Comment Enter information that appears in the general information section at the beginning of the report. Remote command: on page 1418 REPort:USER on page 1419 REPort:COMMent...
Page 510: Restoring Settings
Saving instrument settings to a user-defined preset and restoring the instrument settings to user-defined default values ● Restoring all settings on the R&S RTE to the factory-defined values ● Restoring settings from a file (see "To load settings from a saveset file"...
Page 511: File Selection Dialog
1. Press the "File" menu > "Preset setup". 2. Tap the "Factory defaults" button. All settings on the R&S RTE are reset to their factory-defined values. As long as no user-defined preset file is loaded and "Enable user defined preset " is disabled, the [PRESET] key also resets the instrument settings to factory defaults.
Page 512 ® Data and file management R&S File selection dialog Path Tap the path elements to change the current folder. The default folder is defined in Default path for all file operations. You can save the data in a local folder on the instrument, to an external storage device (usually a USB flash drive), or to a folder on a connected network drive.
Page 513: Protocol Analysis
® Protocol analysis R&S Basics of protocol analysis 13 Protocol analysis Using the serial protocol options for the R&S RTE, you can analyze various serial pro- tocols. ● Basics of protocol analysis..................513 ● I²C (option R&S RTE-K1)..................522 ● SPI bus (option R&S RTE-K1)................
Page 514: Decode - General Settings
® Protocol analysis R&S Basics of protocol analysis 13.1.1 Decode - general settings For all protocols, configuration starts with the selection of the serial bus and the proto- col. The "Trigger Setup" button leads directly to the trigger configuration. Table 13-1: Configuration settings are protocol-specific. They are described in the related chapters: ARINC 429 Chapter 13.10.2, "ARINC 429 configuration",...
Page 515: Autoset For Protocols
® Protocol analysis R&S Basics of protocol analysis Decode Enables the decoding of the selected bus. The signal icon of the bus appears on the signal bar. Remote command: on page 1420 BUS<m>[:STATe] 13.1.2 Autoset for protocols If you want to perform a quick protocol measurement, you can use the "Full autoset" function.
Page 516 ® Protocol analysis R&S Basics of protocol analysis For some protocols, the result table provides a button to show the details of the selected frame. Bus label Defines a label to be displayed with the bus. Remote command: on page 1421 BUS<m>:LABel Show decode table Opens a table with decoded data of the serial signal.
Page 517: Label Lists
® Protocol analysis R&S Basics of protocol analysis Show binary signals For each configured line, the binary signal is also displayed. Show threshold lines If enabled, the threshold levels are displayed in the diagram. Remote command: on page 1421 BUS<m>:THReshold Data format Sets the data format for the values displayed in the decode table and in the combs of the decoded signal.
Page 518: Content And Format Of The Ptt File
® Protocol analysis R&S Basics of protocol analysis The frame captions of the decoded signal show the symbolic label instead of the ID or address values. Hence it is easy to identify the messages of the different bus nodes. You can also use the label list to trigger on an identifier or address. Instead of entering the value, you select the name, which is defined in the label list.
Page 519: Label List - General Settings
® Protocol analysis R&S Basics of protocol analysis Standard lines Standard lines define the contents of the label list. The rules for standard lines follow the csv convention, they are: ● Values are separated by commas ● Space characters following a delimiter are ignored ●...
Page 520 ® Protocol analysis R&S Basics of protocol analysis The common settings for all protocols are: Load from file Selects and loads a label list file. Available file formats are PTT, CSV, DBC (CAN only), and XML (FIBEX files, FlexRay only). Label lists are protocol-specific.
Page 521: Bit Pattern Editor
® Protocol analysis R&S Basics of protocol analysis 13.1.5 Bit pattern editor If you want to enter a specified address or data pattern, the bit pattern editor helps you to enter the pattern in various formats - decimal, hexadecimal, octal, binary and ASCII. The editor displays the pattern in two columns.
Page 522: I²C (Option R&S Rte-K1)
● Acknowledge: takes place after every byte. The receiver of the address or data sends the acknowledge bit to the transmitter. The R&S RTE supports all operating speed modes: high-speed, fast mode plus, fast mode, and standard mode. Data transfer The format of a simple I²C message (frame) with 7-bit addressing consists of the fol-...
Page 523 Figure 13-3: 10-bit address, read access Trigger The R&S RTE can trigger on various parts of I²C messages. The data and clock lines must be connected to the input channels, triggering on math and reference waveforms is not possible.
Page 524: I²C Configuration
® Protocol analysis R&S I²C (option R&S RTE-K1) ● Repeated start condition ● Transfer direction (read or write) ● Bytes with missing acknowledge bit ● Specific slave address or address range ● Specific data pattern in the message 13.2.2 I²C configuration 13.2.2.1...
Page 525: Configuring I²C Protocol
Do not combine a reference waveform with channel or math waveform because the time correlation of these waveforms might differ. Alternatively, digital channels can be used if MSO option R&S RTE-B1 is installed. Dig- ital and analog channels cannot be used at the same time.
Page 526: I²C Trigger
® Protocol analysis R&S I²C (option R&S RTE-K1) For details on configuration settings, see Chapter 13.2.2, "I²C configuration", on page 524. 1. Press the [PROTOCOL] key on the front panel. 2. Select the tab of the bus you want to set up, for example "SB1".
Page 527 ® Protocol analysis R&S I²C (option R&S RTE-K1) Make sure that: ● In the [PROTOCOL] > "Decode" tab: – The correct "Protocol" is selected. – The data sources of the serial bus are channel signals. ● In the "Trigger" > "Setup" tab: –...
Page 528 ® Protocol analysis R&S I²C (option R&S RTE-K1) No Ack (Missing Ack) ← Trigger type Missing acknowledge bit: the instrument triggers if the data line remains HIGH during the clock pulse following a transmitted byte. You can also localize specific missing acknowledge bits by setting the No Ack condi- tions.
Page 529 ® Protocol analysis R&S I²C (option R&S RTE-K1) Address and data ← Trigger type Sets the trigger to a combination of address and data condition. You can specify: ● Adress Type ● R/W bit ● "Address" on page 530 ●...
Page 530 ® Protocol analysis R&S I²C (option R&S RTE-K1) For "7 bit" and "10 bit", enter the address bits in the Address field, and use the "R/W bit" on page 530 field to select the transfer direction. For "7+1 bit", enter the seven address bits and also the R/W bit in the "Address" field.
Page 531: Triggering On I²C Signals
® Protocol analysis R&S I²C (option R&S RTE-K1) Remote command: on page 1433 TRIGger<m>:I2C:DPOPerator on page 1433 TRIGger<m>:I2C:DPOSition on page 1433 TRIGger<m>:I2C:DPTO Data Specifies the trigger conditions for the data bit pattern. In binary format, use the following characters: 1; 0; or X (do not care). To enter the pat- tern in other formats use the bit pattern editor, see Chapter 13.1.5, "Bit pattern...
Page 532 ® Protocol analysis R&S I²C (option R&S RTE-K1) ● Symbolic label: name of the address, specifying its function in the bus network. Example: I C PTT file # ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- @FILE_VERSION = 1.00 @PROTOCOL_NAME = i2c # --------------------------------------------------------------------------- # Labels for I2C protocol...
Page 533: I²C Decode Results
® Protocol analysis R&S I²C (option R&S RTE-K1) 13.2.5 I²C decode results When the configuration of the serial bus is complete, the signal can be decoded: 1. In the "Protocol" dialog > "Decode" tab, enable "Decode". 2. In the "Protocol" dialog > "Display" tab, select additional result display settings: "Show decode table"...
Page 534 ® Protocol analysis R&S I²C (option R&S RTE-K1) No Ack bit is sent according to the protocol definition and is not an error. Thus, the decode results in the table indicate "Ack" for the second frame. Figure 13-5: Decoded I2C signal with incomplete data, and decode results...
Page 535: Search On Decoded I²C Data
® Protocol analysis R&S I²C (option R&S RTE-K1) Column Description Values Value of all data bytes of the frame. The data format is selected below the table. Bit rate Value of the bit rate Zooming on decoded results The zoom functions allow you to analyze the decode results in more detail. If "Zoom coupling"...
Page 536: I²C Search Setup
® Protocol analysis R&S I²C (option R&S RTE-K1) 13.2.6.1 I²C search setup Access: [SEARCH] > "Setup" tab Search criteria Enable the events to be searched for. Unlike triggering, where you can trigger only on one defined event, you can search for various different events in one search.
Page 537 ® Protocol analysis R&S I²C (option R&S RTE-K1) on page 1444 SEARch:TRIGger:I2C:STCNdition on page 1444 SEARch:TRIGger:I2C:NACKnowledge on page 1444 SEARch:TRIGger:I2C:SADDress on page 1445 SEARch:TRIGger:I2C:ADOR on page 1445 SEARch:TRIGger:I2C:ADData Address setup: Condition, Type, Addr. min, Addr. max, R/W bit The address setup consists of the condition, type, R/W bit and one or two address pat- terns.
Page 538: I²C Search Results
® Protocol analysis R&S I²C (option R&S RTE-K1) Address OR setup: , Monitor Address type, Address, R/W bit The address OR setup consists of the monitor, address type, address and an R/W bit. The address OR setup settings are the same as in the I2C trigger setup, see Chap- ter 13.2.3.1, "I²C trigger...
Page 539: Spi Bus (Option R&S Rte-K1)
Chapter 11.4, "Result presentation", on page 463 The remote commands for the search reults are described in Chapter 18.17.3.5, "I²C search results", on page 1451. 13.3 SPI bus (option R&S RTE-K1) ● The SPI protocol....................539 ● configuration....................540 ● trigger......................543 ●...
Page 540: Spi Configuration
A word contains a number of successive bits. The word length is defined in the pro- tocol configuration. ● A frame contains a number of successive words, at least one word. For SPI buses, the R&S RTE provides the following trigger possibilities: ● On frame start ●...
Page 541 Sets the input channel of the clock line. Analog channels, math waveforms, and refer- ence waveforms can be used for decoding. Alternatively, digital channels can be used if MSO option R&S RTE-B1 is installed. Dig- ital and analog channels cannot be used at the same time.
Page 542 ® Protocol analysis R&S SPI bus (option R&S RTE-K1) Threshold Sets the threshold value for digitization of signals for each line. If the signal value on the line is higher than the threshold, the signal state is high. Otherwise, the signal state is considered low if the signal value is below the threshold.
Page 543: Configuring Spi Signals
® Protocol analysis R&S SPI bus (option R&S RTE-K1) "CLK timeout" Defines a timeout on the clock line SCLK as limiter between two frames. The timeout condition is used for SPI connections without an SS line. Enter the minimum clock idle time in the field.
Page 544 ® Protocol analysis R&S SPI bus (option R&S RTE-K1) Make sure that: ● In the [PROTOCOL] > "Decode" tab: – The correct "Protocol" is selected. – The data sources of the serial bus are channel signals. ● In the "Trigger" > "Setup" tab: –...
Page 545 ® Protocol analysis R&S SPI bus (option R&S RTE-K1) "Frame start Triggers on the start of the frame when the clock idle time exceeds (Timeout)" the "Timeout" time. This trigger type is available if Frame condition set to "CLK timeout".
Page 546: Triggering On Spi
® Protocol analysis R&S SPI bus (option R&S RTE-K1) The bit pattern editor helps you to enter the pattern, see Chapter 13.1.5, "Bit pattern editor", on page 521. Remote command: on page 1465 TRIGger<m>:SPI:MOSipattern on page 1465 TRIGger<m>:SPI:MISopattern Position ← MOSI and MISO data conditions Operator for the data position.
Page 547 ® Protocol analysis R&S SPI bus (option R&S RTE-K1) 2. In the "Protocol" dialog > "Display" tab, select additional result display settings: "Show decode table" and "Show binary signals". For a description of the display settings, see also Chapter 13.1.3, "Display",...
Page 548 ® Protocol analysis R&S SPI bus (option R&S RTE-K1) Figure 13-8: Decode results In the figure above, the first three frames contain two words each. The fourth frame is incomplete, only one word of the frame was recognized Table 13-3: Content of the "Decode results" table...
Page 549: Search On Decoded Spi Data
® Protocol analysis R&S SPI bus (option R&S RTE-K1) The "Numeric Results" dialog opens. For details, see Chapter 12.2.4, "Numeric Results", on page 492. 2. Select the decode results you want to export, the file format, and the delimiter. 3. Tap "Save" or "Save as".
Page 550: Spi Search Results
® Protocol analysis R&S SPI bus (option R&S RTE-K1) "Frame start Searches for the start of the frame when slave select signal SS (SS)" changes to the active state. This type is available if the slave select line is configured in the bus setup, and the frame condition is "SS".
Page 551: Uart/Rs-232/Rs-422/Rs-485 (Option R&S Rte-K2)
Chapter 18.17.4.5, "SPI search results", on page 1474. 13.4 UART/RS-232/RS-422/RS-485 (option R&S RTE-K2) 13.4.1 The UART / RS232 interface The Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter UART converts a word of data into serial data, and vice versa. It is the base of many serial protocols like of RS-232. The UART uses only one line, or two lines for transmitter and receiver.
Page 552: Uart Configuration
The UART protocol has no clock for synchronization. The receiver synchronizes by means of the start and stop bits, and the bit rate that must be known to the receiver. Trigger The R&S RTE can trigger on specified parts of UART serial signals: ● Start bit ●...
Page 553 Do not combine a reference waveform with channel or math waveform because the time correlation of these waveforms might differ. Alternatively, digital channels can be used if MSO option R&S RTE-B1 is installed. Dig- ital and analog channels cannot be used at the same time.
Page 554 ® Protocol analysis R&S UART/RS-232/RS-422/RS-485 (option R&S RTE-K2) Remote command: on page 1478 BUS<m>:UART:RX:THReshold on page 1479 BUS<m>:UART:TX:THReshold on page 1479 BUS<m>:UART:TECHnology on page 1421 BUS<m>:SETReflevels on page 1421 BUS<m>:FAUToset Polarity Defines the logic levels of the bus. The idle state corresponds to a logic 1. the start bit to a logic 0.
Page 555: Configuring Uart Protocol
® Protocol analysis R&S UART/RS-232/RS-422/RS-485 (option R&S RTE-K2) Remote command: on page 1480 BUS<m>:UART:PARity Packets Allows you to define packets of several words in the data stream. "None" Packets are not considered. "End word" Defines a pattern as end condition of a packet, for example, a reserved word like CR or LF.
Page 556: Uart Trigger
® Protocol analysis R&S UART/RS-232/RS-422/RS-485 (option R&S RTE-K2) 9. Set the "Data bits" and "Parity". 10. Set the "Bit order", "Polarity" and "Packets". 11. Enable "Decode". 13.4.3 UART trigger 13.4.3.1 UART trigger settings Access: [PROTOCOL] > "Trigger" tab > "Source = Serial Bus"...
Page 557 ® Protocol analysis R&S UART/RS-232/RS-422/RS-485 (option R&S RTE-K2) "Data" Trigger on a serial pattern at a defined position in the data packet. The pattern can include several subsequent symbols (data frames). "Data conditions" on page 557. "Parity error" Triggers on a parity error indicating a transmission error. This trigger type is only available if a parity is configured for the UART bus.
Page 558: Triggering On Uart Signals
® Protocol analysis R&S UART/RS-232/RS-422/RS-485 (option R&S RTE-K2) Index min, Index max ← Data conditions Sets the number of words before the first word of interest. These offset words are ignored. If the Position defines a range, the first and the last words of interest are defined.
Page 559 ® Protocol analysis R&S UART/RS-232/RS-422/RS-485 (option R&S RTE-K2) Figure 13-10: Decoded and binary UART signal blue = start and stop bits if ok = start error, stop error, parity error orange = parity bit if ok yellow = word ok magenta = word contains error The "Decode results"...
Page 560: Can And Can Fd (Option R&S Rte-K3/K9)
"Decode results", on page 1485. 13.5 CAN and CAN FD (option R&S RTE-K3/K9) CAN is the Controller Area Network, a bus system designed by Bosch for use within automotive network architecture, for example, for brake, power train and engine man- agement.
Page 561: The Can Protocol
CAN protocol with flexible data rate - CAN FD. It introduces a higher bit rate in the data phase up to 15 Mbit/s and an extended data field from up to 64 bytes. The R&S RTE provides decoding, triggering and searching CAN and CAN FD signals with following options: ●...
Page 562 ® Protocol analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (option R&S RTE-K3/K9) Figure 13-12: Configuration for CAN FD Figure 13-13: Configuration for CAN See also: Chapter 13.1.1, "Decode - general settings", on page 514. User Manual 1326.1032.02 ─ 20...
Page 563 Alternatively, digital channels can be used if MSO option R&S RTE-B1 is installed. Dig- ital and analog channels cannot be used at the same time.
Page 564 The list of predefined values is also available in the keypad. Remote command: on page 1490 BUS<m>:CAN:BITRate Data rate The setting is available in CAN FD option R&S RTE-K9. User Manual 1326.1032.02 ─ 20...
Page 565 Protocol analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (option R&S RTE-K3/K9) Sets the bit rate of the data phase. The data rate can be equal or higher than the arbi- tration rate; and it is uniform and fixed for a given CAN FD bus.
Page 566: Can / Can Fd Trigger
1492 BUS<m>:CAN:FDATa:JWIDth 13.5.3 CAN / CAN FD trigger The R&S RTE can trigger on various events in a CAN or CAN FD frame. Trigger condi- tions include start of frame, frame ID, data pattern, or error conditions. 13.5.3.1 Trigger settings Access: [PROTOCOL] >...
Page 567 ® Protocol analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (option R&S RTE-K3/K9) Make sure that: ● In the [PROTOCOL] > "Decode" tab: – The correct "Protocol" is selected. – The data sources of the serial bus are channel signals. ● In the "Trigger" > "Setup" tab: –...
Page 568 Standard Selects the CAN standard: "CAN", "CAN FD", or "Any". The setting is available in CAN FD option R&S RTE-K9. Use "Any" to trigger on either CAN or CAN-FD frame. In this case, the trigger configu- ration provides all possible settings, for CAN as well as for CAN FD.
Page 569 ® Protocol analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (option R&S RTE-K3/K9) "11 bit" Identifier length of the CAN base frame format. The instrument trig- gers on the sample point of the IDE bit (identifier extension flag). "29 bit" Identifier length of the CAN extended frame format. The instrument triggers on the sample point of the RTR bit.
Page 570 ® Protocol analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (option R&S RTE-K3/K9) Remote command: on page 1495 TRIGger<m>:CAN:ICONdition on page 1495 TRIGger<m>:CAN:IMIN on page 1496 TRIGger<m>:CAN:IMAX FD bits For standard settings " CAN FD" and "Any", you can trigger on CAN FD-specific bits.
Page 571 The data position sets the location in the data field where the instrument looks for the specified data pattern. The setting is available in CAN FD option R&S RTE-K9. The position can be defined if the data field of the frame is longer than 8 bytes - if DLC ≥9.
Page 572 TRIGger<m>:CAN:FDATa:DPTO Error conditions If a CAN detects an error, it transmits an error flag at the next bit. The R&S RTE detects errors in the message and triggers on these errors even if no CAN node sends an error flag.
Page 573: Triggering On Can Fd Data
Protocol analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (option R&S RTE-K3/K9) A stuff count error occurs if th received stuff count value does not match the value calculated from the own stuff bit count. Only relevant for CAN FD signals in ISO standard.
Page 574 ® Protocol analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (option R&S RTE-K3/K9) Figure 13-15: Trigger setup to trigger on the 2nd data byte with value = E7 Figure 13-16: Data type trigger on 2nd data byte with value = E7 User Manual 1326.1032.02 ─ 20...
Page 575 ® Protocol analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (option R&S RTE-K3/K9) Example: Triggering on the seventh or later data byte The CAN FD frame has 12 or more data bytes, where the value of the seventh or later data byte should be 17.
Page 576 ® Protocol analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (option R&S RTE-K3/K9) Figure 13-18: Data type trigger on data byte with the 7th or later byte value = 17 Example: Triggering on a data byte at a given position The CAN FD frame has 12 or more data bytes. the trigger is set at the 8th data byte starting at the 4th data byte or later, with data byte value = 17.
Page 577 Protocol analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (option R&S RTE-K3/K9) Figure 13-19: Trigger setup to trigger on data byte with value = 17 at 11th data byte location The instrument skips the first 3 data bytes and starts comparing the data pattern with the 4th data byte.
Page 578: Can / Can Fd Label List
Label list files (symbolic data files) for CAN and CAN FD protocols are available in PTT and CSV file formats, similar to other serial protocols. In addition, the R&S RTE can read and apply DBC files to the decoded signal and provides settings for symbolic trig- gering and symbolic search.
Page 579: Ptt And Csv Files For Can / Can Fd
® Protocol analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (option R&S RTE-K3/K9) The usage of DBC files is described in Chapter 13.5.7, "Symbolic trigger, decode and search", on page 593. 13.5.4.2 PTT and CSV files for CAN / CAN FD Label list files are protocol-specific. A PTT label file for CAN protocols contains three values for each identifier: ●...
Page 580: Can And Can Fd Decode Results
® Protocol analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (option R&S RTE-K3/K9) 29,01A54321h,Throttle 29,13A00FA2h,LightState 29,0630ABCDh,Engine_Status 29,03B1C002h,Airbag_Status 29,01234ABCh,NM_Gateway # ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- For general information on the "Label List" tab, see Chapter 13.1.4, "Label lists", on page 517. Remote command: ● on page 1503 BUS<m>:CAN:FRAMe<n>:SYMBol?
Page 581 ® Protocol analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (option R&S RTE-K3/K9) The binary results of data bytes are displayed MSB first. For CAN protocol, the endianness setting ("Transfer") is a trigger setting and not con- sidered for decoding. Figure 13-21: Decoded and binary CAN signal, and decode results green brackets [...]...
Page 582 ® Protocol analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (option R&S RTE-K3/K9) Figure 13-22: Decoded CAN FD signal with data type = CAN_L, arbitration rate = 1 Mbps and data rate = 2 Mbps You can also load and apply industry-standard DBC files. The symbolic names from the file are applied to the display of the decoded data, see Chapter 13.5.7.2, "Symbolic...
Page 583 "Values" column, if a DBC file is loaded and the "Data format" is "Symbolic". SC (dec) Stuff count value, decimal value. Only available for CAN FD ISO signals, option R&S RTE-K9. CRC (hex) Value of the Cyclic Redundance Check (checksum), hexadecimal value Form error cause Reason of a form error if a form error occurred You can also enable "Show details"...
Page 584 ® Protocol analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (option R&S RTE-K3/K9) Data format You can select various data formats for the values displayed in the decode table and in the combs of the decoded signal. Remote command: ● on page 1422 BUS<m>:FORMat...
Page 585: Search On Decoded Can Or Can Fd Data
® Protocol analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (option R&S RTE-K3/K9) Remote commands Remote commands are described in Chapter 18.17.6.3, "Decode results", on page 1500. 13.5.6 Search on decoded CAN or CAN FD data Using the search functionality, you can find various events in the decoded data. You can find the same events that you can trigger on, and even many more, since several event types can also be combined.
Page 586 ® Protocol analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (option R&S RTE-K3/K9) If a DBC label list file is applied, an additional criterion "Symbolic" is provided, see Chapter 13.5.7.3, "Symbolic search", on page 596. "Start of frame" Searches for the first edge of the dominant SOF bit (synchronization bit).
Page 587 Standard Selects the CAN standard: "CAN", "CAN FD", or "Any". The setting is available in CAN FD option R&S RTE-K9. Use "Any" to search for both CAN and CAN-FD frames. In this case, the search config- uration provides all possible settings, for CAN as well as for CAN FD.
Page 588 For standard settings " CAN FD" and "Any", you can search for CAN FD-specific bits. For details, see "FD bits" on page 570. The setting is available in CAN FD option R&S RTE-K9. Remote command: on page 1517 SEARch:TRIGger:CAN:FDATa[:FDF] on page 1517...
Page 589 The data position sets the location in the data field where the instrument looks for the specified data pattern. The setting is available in CAN FD option R&S RTE-K9. The position can be defined if the data field of the frame is longer than 8 bytes - if DLC ≥9.
Page 590: Search Results
® Protocol analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (option R&S RTE-K3/K9) Remote command: on page 1516 SEARch:TRIGger:CAN:CRCerror on page 1516 SEARch:TRIGger:CAN:BITSterror on page 1517 SEARch:TRIGger:CAN:FORMerror on page 1516 SEARch:TRIGger:CAN:ACKerror on page 1517 SEARch:TRIGger:CAN:FDATa:SCERror 13.5.6.2 Search results To get search results, "Enable" the search. You can minimize, shift or close the search dialog.
Page 591: Searching Can Fd Data
® Protocol analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (option R&S RTE-K3/K9) ● on page 1521 SEARch:RESult:CAN:FRAMe<m>:DLCValue? ● on page 1520 SEARch:RESult:CAN:FRAMe<m>:IDSTate? ● on page 1522 SEARch:RESult:CAN:FRAMe<m>:IDTYpe? ● on page 1522 SEARch:RESult:CAN:FRAMe<m>:IDValue? ● on page 1522 SEARch:RESult:CAN:FDATa:FRAMe<m>:STANdard? ● on page 1523 SEARch:RESult:CAN:FRAMe<m>:STARt?
Page 592 ® Protocol analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (option R&S RTE-K3/K9) Example: Searching for a specific byte anywhere in the frame The CAN FD frame has 8 or more data bytes, containing at least one data byte with value = CB anywhere in the data field.
Page 593: Symbolic Trigger, Decode And Search
Figure 13-27: Search result 13.5.7 Symbolic trigger, decode and search The R&S RTE can read and apply industry-standard DBC files to the decoded signal and provides settings for symbolic triggering and symbolic search. For a description of DBC files, see Chapter 13.5.4.1, "DBC files for CAN / CAN...
Page 594 ® Protocol analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (option R&S RTE-K3/K9) The "Frame type" is automatically set to "Data", and the "Identifier" is shown for infor- mation. Specific settings for the symbolic trigger are: Message........................594 Trigger on signal......................594 Signal.......................... 594 Condition........................
Page 595: Symbolic Decode Waveform
Protocol analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (option R&S RTE-K3/K9) The setting is used by symbolic trigger and symbolic search. Thus, you always trigger on and search for the same signal if symbolic trigger and symbolic search is used at the same time.
Page 596: Symbolic Search
® Protocol analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (option R&S RTE-K3/K9) Figure 13-28: Result table and decoded CAN signal with applied DBC file and zoom on EngineData message Remote command: ● on page 1526 BUS<m>:CAN:FRAMe<n>:SDATa? ● on page 1508 BUS<m>:CAN:FRAMe<n>:SDEXport? 13.5.7.3...
Page 597 ® Protocol analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (option R&S RTE-K3/K9) If symbolic search is active, the "Frame type" is automatically set to "Data", and the "Identifier" is shown for information. Symbolic Enables the symbolic search and disables all other search criteria.
Page 598: Symbolic Search Results
® Protocol analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (option R&S RTE-K3/K9) Remote command: on page 1528 SEARch:TRIGger:CAN:SYMBolic:SIGValue Condition Sets the operator to set a specific data pattern or symbolic value ("Equal" or "Not equal") or a data range. This condition is also used to search for data, see "Data setup: DLC, NDB, Condition,...
Page 599: Lin (Option R&S Rte-K3)
● on page 1527 SEARch:RESult:CAN:FRAMe<m>:SDATa? 13.6 LIN (option R&S RTE-K3) The Local Interconnect Network (LIN) is a simple, low-cost bus system used within automotive network architectures. LIN is usually a subnetwork of a CAN bus. The pri- mary purpose of LIN is the integration of uncritical sensors and actuators with low- bandwidth requirements.
Page 600: The Lin Protocol
LIN schedule and sends identifier to the secondaries ● Synchronization mechanism for clock recovery by secondary nodes without crystal or ceramics resonator The R&S RTE supports several versions of the LIN standard: v1.3, v2.0, v2.1 and the American SAE J2602. Data transfer Basic communication concept of LIN: ●...
Page 601: Lin Configuration
The identifier byte consists of 6 bits for the frame identifier and two parity bits. This combination is known as protected identifier. Trigger The R&S RTE can trigger on various parts of LIN frames. The data line must be con- nected to an input channel, triggering on math and reference waveforms is not possi- ble.
Page 602 Alternatively, digital channels can be used if MSO option R&S RTE-B1 is installed. Dig- ital and analog channels cannot be used at the same time.
Page 603: Configuring Lin Signals
® Protocol analysis R&S LIN (option R&S RTE-K3) ● "Auto thresholds" Executes the measurement of reference levels and sets the thresholds to the mid- dle reference level of the measured amplitude. ● "Preset thresholds" Selects the default threshold voltage for various signal technologies from a list. The value is set to "Manual"...
Page 604: Lin Trigger
® Protocol analysis R&S LIN (option R&S RTE-K3) 6. Set the logical thresholds. Either according to technology definition with "Preset thresholds", or to an auto- matic value with "Full autoset"/ "Auto thresholds", or enter a user-defined value directly in the "Threshold" fields.
Page 605 ® Protocol analysis R&S LIN (option R&S RTE-K3) Trigger type Selects the trigger type for LIN analysis. "Start of frame Triggers on the stop bit of the sync field. (Sync)" "Identifier" Sets the trigger to one specific identifier or an identifier range. Enter only the 6-bit identifier without parity bits, not the protected identifier.
Page 606 ® Protocol analysis R&S LIN (option R&S RTE-K3) Remote command: on page 1533 TRIGger<m>:LIN:ICONdition on page 1533 TRIGger<m>:LIN:IMIN on page 1533 TRIGger<m>:LIN:IMAX Identifier OR setup: Monitor, Frame ID Sets the trigger to a combination of up to four identifiers. Enter the patterns in the "Frame ID"...
Page 607 ® Protocol analysis R&S LIN (option R&S RTE-K3) "Data length" Sets the length of the bit pattern to be found, in bytes. For Big Endian transfer direction, you can trigger on a number of bytes less than the data length of the frame, that means, on the first bytes that are transmitted.
Page 608: Triggering On Lin Signals
® Protocol analysis R&S LIN (option R&S RTE-K3) Remote command: on page 1536 TRIGger<m>:LIN:CHKSerror on page 1537 TRIGger<m>:LIN:ERRPattern on page 1537 TRIGger<m>:LIN:CRCDatalen on page 1537 TRIGger<m>:LIN:STANdard on page 1536 TRIGger<m>:LIN:IPERror on page 1536 TRIGger<m>:LIN:SYERror 13.6.3.2 Triggering on LIN signals Prerequisites: An LIN bus is configured, see Chapter 13.2.2.2, "Configuring I²C proto-...
Page 609 ® Protocol analysis R&S LIN (option R&S RTE-K3) # Following ID is provided as integer 33,Mirror 0x37,Indoor lights # Labels for reserved addresses 0x3C,Master_Request_Frame 0x3D,Slave_Response_Frame # ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- For general information on label lists, see Chapter 13.1.4, "Label lists", on page 517.
Page 610 ® Protocol analysis R&S LIN (option R&S RTE-K3) ● Encoding to signal mapping Example of a LIN LDF file LIN_description_file; LIN_protocol_version = "2.0"; LIN_language_version = "2.0"; LIN_speed = 19.2 kbps; Nodes { Master: Master1, 10 ms, 0.1 ms; Slaves: Slave_Motor, Slave_Sensor;...
Page 611: Lin Decode Results
® Protocol analysis R&S LIN (option R&S RTE-K3) Remote commands: ● on page 1539 BUS<m>:LIN:FRAMe<n>:SDATa? ● on page 1540 BUS<m>:LIN:FRAMe<n>:SDEXport? 13.6.5 LIN decode results When the configuration of the serial bus is complete, the signal can be decoded: 1. In the "Protocol" dialog > "Decode" tab, enable "Decode".
Page 612 ® Protocol analysis R&S LIN (option R&S RTE-K3) Figure 13-32: Decoded and binary LIN signal, and decode results green brackets [...] = start and end of frame green frame header = frame state is ok red frame header = error in frame...
Page 613 ® Protocol analysis R&S LIN (option R&S RTE-K3) Column Description Label Symbolic label name defined in the label list Frame PID (hex) Protected identifier Values Value of the data bytes. The data format is selected below the table. Chks (hex)
Page 614: Search On Decoded Lin Data
® Protocol analysis R&S LIN (option R&S RTE-K3) Remote command: ● on page 1422 BUS<m>:FORMat Export of decode results 1. In the protocol decode table, press "Export". The "Numeric Results" dialog opens. For details, see Chapter 12.2.4, "Numeric Results", on page 492.
Page 615 ® Protocol analysis R&S LIN (option R&S RTE-K3) Search types Sets the type to be searched for. Searches for the stop bit of the sync field. "Start of frame (Sync)" "Identifier" Searches for one specific identifier or an identifier range.
Page 616 ® Protocol analysis R&S LIN (option R&S RTE-K3) on page 1547 SEARch:TRIGger:LIN:WUFRame on page 1546 SEARch:TRIGger:LIN:SERRor Identifier setup: Condition, Frame ID min, Frame ID max The identifier setup consists of the condition and one or two frame ID patterns. The identifier setup settings are the same as in the LIN trigger setup, see "Identifier...
Page 617: Lin Search Results
● on page 1557 SEARch:RESult:LIN:FRAMe<m>:BYTE<n>:VALue? 13.7 FlexRay (option R&S RTE-K4) FlexRay is designed for use in safety-related distributed applications in the automotive industry. It is applied in real-time applications when higher data rates and reliable com- munication are required. In particular, FlexRay supports x-by-wire applications, for example, steer-by-wire or brake-by-wire.
Page 618: Flexray Configuration
For measurements of logic signals, for example, of the logic signal inside the FlexRay node, between the communication controller and the bus driver. If MSO option R&S RTE-B1 is installed, you can use digital input channels. It is possible to measure simultaneously on a data line and on the enable line.
Page 619 If the source type is "Logic", digital channels can be used (MSO option R&S RTE-B1 is required). Digital and analog channels cannot be used at the same time in a bus.
Page 620 ® Protocol analysis R&S FlexRay (option R&S RTE-K4) Idle Idle Threshold high Bus plus 2.5 V Threshold low Threshold high Bus minus 2.5 V Threshold low Threshold high BP - BM Threshold low For measurements inside the FlexRay node (with "Source type" = "Logic"), each line requires its threshold level.
Page 621: Configuring Flexray Protocol
® Protocol analysis R&S FlexRay (option R&S RTE-K4) Remote command: on page 1561 BUS<m>:FLXRay:POLarity Bit rate Selects the number of transmitted bits per second from a list. Remote command: on page 1562 BUS<m>:FLXRay:BITRate Channel Selects the FlexRay channel on which the signal is measured, either channel A or channel B.
Page 622: Flexray Trigger
® Protocol analysis R&S FlexRay (option R&S RTE-K4) 13.7.2 FlexRay trigger 13.7.2.1 FlexRay trigger Access: [PROTOCOL] > "Trigger" tab > "Source = Serial Bus" Make sure that: ● In the [PROTOCOL] > "Decode" tab: – The correct "Protocol" is selected.
Page 623 ® Protocol analysis R&S FlexRay (option R&S RTE-K4) "Identifier Triggers on the decoded frame content, on header and payload data: ● +data" Indicator bits, see "Indicator bits" on page 623 ● Frame identifier, see "Frame ID (min/max)" on page 623 ●...
Page 624 ® Protocol analysis R&S FlexRay (option R&S RTE-K4) Indica- Payload Cycle Frame ID Header CRC Payload Trailer tors length count 5 bits 11 bits 7 bits 11 bits 6 bits To trigger on a frame ID, you have to define a condition and one or two identifier pat- terns.
Page 625 ® Protocol analysis R&S FlexRay (option R&S RTE-K4) Also, you can define a "Step" to trigger on each n-th cycle inside the given range. This allows for specific triggering if slot multiplexing is used. If the cycle count is not relevant for the trigger setup, set it to "Off".
Page 626: Triggering On Flexray Signals
® Protocol analysis R&S FlexRay (option R&S RTE-K4) Symbol Triggers on a symbol or on a wakeup pattern. Trigger type: "Symbol" "CAS/MTS" Collision Avoidance Symbol / Media access Test Symbol. These sym- bols are identical and can be sent in the optional symbol window at the end of a communication cycle.
Page 627: Flexray Label List
® Protocol analysis R&S FlexRay (option R&S RTE-K4) For details, see Chapter 13.7.2.1, "FlexRay trigger", on page 622. 13.7.3 FlexRay label list Label lists are protocol-specific. A FlexRay label file contains four values for each iden- tifier: ● "ID / Addr": number of the slot in which the frame is transmitted ●...
Page 628: Flexray Decode Results
® Protocol analysis R&S FlexRay (option R&S RTE-K4) See also: Chapter 13.1.4, "Label lists", on page 517. Remote command: ● on page 1572 BUS<m>:FLXRay:FRAMe<n>:SYMBol? 13.7.4 FlexRay decode results When the configuration of the serial bus is complete, the signal can be decoded: 1.
Page 629 ® Protocol analysis R&S FlexRay (option R&S RTE-K4) Figure 13-34: FlexRay - decoded static slot Data is decoded and displayed in the order of its reception. The "Decode results" box shows the detailed decoded data for each frame as it is received.
Page 630 ® Protocol analysis R&S FlexRay (option R&S RTE-K4) Figure 13-35: FlexRay - decoded dynamic slot and results table Table 13-7: Content of the "Decode results" table Column Description State Overall state of the frame. "Insuffcient waveform length" indicates that the frame is not completely contained in the acquisition.
Page 631 ® Protocol analysis R&S FlexRay (option R&S RTE-K4) Figure 13-36: FlexRay - decode results with applied label list Data format You can select various data formats for the values displayed in the decode table and in the combs of the decoded signal.
Page 632: Search On Decoded Flexray Data
® Protocol analysis R&S FlexRay (option R&S RTE-K4) The "Numeric Results" dialog opens. For details, see Chapter 12.2.4, "Numeric Results", on page 492. 2. Select the decode results you want to export, the file format, and the delimiter. 3. Tap "Save" or "Save as".
Page 633 ® Protocol analysis R&S FlexRay (option R&S RTE-K4) Search Criteria Sets one criterion or an AND-combination of criteria to be searched for. If more than one criterion is selected, all criteria must be fulfilled by a frame for it to be shown in the search results.
Page 634 ® Protocol analysis R&S FlexRay (option R&S RTE-K4) Pay- Header Cycle Frame ID load Payload Trailer count length Indicators 5 bits "Payload pre- Indicates a Network Management Vector in the payload segment. amble" The NMV allows the host processor to send data directly, without pro- cessing by the communication controller.
Page 635 ® Protocol analysis R&S FlexRay (option R&S RTE-K4) The setup conditions are the same as in the FlexRay trigger setup, see "Cycle count (min, max), Step" on page 624. Remote command: on page 1578 SEARch:TRIGger:FLXRay:CENable on page 1579 SEARch:TRIGger:FLXRay:CMIN on page 1579...
Page 636: Flexray Search Results
® Protocol analysis R&S FlexRay (option R&S RTE-K4) Remote command: on page 1585 SEARch:TRIGger:FLXRay:BSSerror on page 1585 SEARch:TRIGger:FLXRay:FESerror on page 1586 SEARch:TRIGger:FLXRay:FSSerror on page 1586 SEARch:TRIGger:FLXRay:HCRCerror on page 1586 SEARch:TRIGger:FLXRay:PCRCerror 13.7.5.2 FlexRay search results To get search results, "Enable" the search. You can minimize, shift or close the search dialog.
Page 637: Audio Signals (Option R&S Rte-K5)
The data word can be shorter than the channel length, and the receiver ignores the remaining bits. The first byte of the audio word is delayed one clock period from the leading edge of the word select pulse. The R&S RTE can decode I²S standard signals with MSBF and LSBF bit order.
Page 638: Left Justified Data Format
The data word can be shorter than the channel length. In addition to the standard configuration, the R&S RTE can analyze also left justified data formats which send the data word with offset to the WS edge. The bit order can be MSBF or LSBF.
Page 639: Audio Configuration
® Protocol analysis R&S Audio signals (option R&S RTE-K5) ≥ Word length + Channel offset Channel length 13.8.2 Audio configuration 13.8.2.1 Audio signal configuration Access: [PROTOCOL] > "Decode" tab > "Protocol" = Audio Make sure that the tab of the correct serial bus is selected.
Page 640 ® Protocol analysis R&S Audio signals (option R&S RTE-K5) Specific settings for TDM audio signals are: ● "Word length" on page 643 ● "Bit order" on page 643 ● "Channel offset" on page 643 ● "#TDM CHs" on page 643 ●...
Page 641 SCLK Polarity Sets th polarity of the clock signal, that is the edge at which the instrument samples the data on the data line. Usually, the rising edge is used. The R&S RTE can also analyze the converse setup. Remote command: on page 1593 BUS<m>:I2S:CLOCk:POLarity...
Page 642 ® Protocol analysis R&S Audio signals (option R&S RTE-K5) Remote command: on page 1593 BUS<m>:I2S:WSELect:SOURce WS / FSYNC Polarity For a word select line, the polarity defines the word select values assigned to the left and right channels. ● "Normal": usually, 0 indicates the left channel, and 1 indicates the right channel.
Page 643 ® Protocol analysis R&S Audio signals (option R&S RTE-K5) on page 1595 BUS<m>:I2S:WSELect:THReshold on page 1421 BUS<m>:SETReflevels Channel order Defines if the left or the right channel is the first channel in the frame. The setting is not available for TDM audio signals.
Page 644: Configuring Audio Protocol
® Protocol analysis R&S Audio signals (option R&S RTE-K5) 13.8.2.2 Configuring audio protocol The configuration of the Audio is simple - assign the two lines to input channels, and set the thresholds. For details on configuration settings, see Chapter 13.8.2.1, "Audio signal configura- tion",...
Page 645 ® Protocol analysis R&S Audio signals (option R&S RTE-K5) Make sure that: ● In the [PROTOCOL] > "Decode" tab: – The correct "Protocol" is selected. – The data sources of the serial bus are channel signals. ● In the "Trigger" > "Setup" tab: –...
Page 646 ® Protocol analysis R&S Audio signals (option R&S RTE-K5) "Frame condi- Sets the trigger on an AND combination of data conditions on differ- tion" ent channels. The instrument triggers if all conditions are met inside one frame. Description of specific trigger type settings: ●...
Page 647 ® Protocol analysis R&S Audio signals (option R&S RTE-K5) The settings are relevant for trigger types Data, Window and Frame condition. "Operator" Defines the operator to set a specific data word ("Equal" or "Not equal") or a data range. "Min data"...
Page 648: Triggering On Audio Signals
® Protocol analysis R&S Audio signals (option R&S RTE-K5) Remote command: on page 1601 TRIGger<m>:I2S:WSSLope 13.8.3.2 Triggering on audio signals Prerequisites: An Audio bus is configured, see Chapter 13.8.2.2, "Configuring audio protocol", on page 644. 1. Press the [PROTOCOL] key and select the "Trigger" tab.
Page 649 ® Protocol analysis R&S Audio signals (option R&S RTE-K5) Figure 13-39: Decoded audio signal, right-justified data format green = frame blue = left channel violet = right channel orange = frame/channel is not completely contained in the acquisition = error Table 13-8: Content of the "Decode results"...
Page 650 ® Protocol analysis R&S Audio signals (option R&S RTE-K5) Figure 13-40: Decoded TDM signal with 4 channels, frame offset 16 bit, channel offset 4 bit, word length 8 bit and inverted FSYNC and SDATA polarity Table 13-9: Content of the "Decode results" table...
Page 651: Track
® Protocol analysis R&S Audio signals (option R&S RTE-K5) 2. Select the decode results you want to export, the file format, and the delimiter. 3. Tap "Save" or "Save as". Remote commands Remote commands are described in Chapter 18.17.9.3, "Decode results",...
Page 652: Displaying And Configuring A Track
® Protocol analysis R&S Audio signals (option R&S RTE-K5) The instrument uses the bus data format to interpret audio data ("Display" tab > "Data format"). ASCII format is not supported. Figure 13-42: Track of all 8 channels of a TDM signal 13.8.5.1...
Page 653: Track Settings In Protocol Setup
® Protocol analysis R&S Audio signals (option R&S RTE-K5) 6. By default, the track is displayed using "Continuous auto scale". If you want to change the scaling, proceed as follows: a) Select the "Result Analysis" tab. b) Disable "Continuous auto scale".
Page 654: Track Settings In Measurement Setup
® Protocol analysis R&S Audio signals (option R&S RTE-K5) See also: Chapter 13.8.5, "Track", on page 651. Remote command: on page 1605 BUS<m>:I2S:TRACk:LEFT on page 1605 BUS<m>:I2S:TRACk:RIGHt on page 1605 BUS<m>:I2S:TRACk:TD1Ch on page 1605 BUS<m>:I2S:TRACk:TD2Ch on page 1605 BUS<m>:I2S:TRACk:TD3Ch on page 1605 BUS<m>:I2S:TRACk:TD4Ch...
Page 655: Track Enabling In Measurement Setup
Measure all events in each acquisition. Before you can enable the track, activate the appropriate measurement. With option R&S RTE-K5 I²S audio signals, you can use the track for protocol mea- surements on decoded audio buses, see Chapter 13.8.5, "Track", on page 651.
Page 656: Displaying And Configuring The Trend
® Protocol analysis R&S Audio signals (option R&S RTE-K5) channel value is a measurement result that creates a point on the trend curve. You can configure the number of points that builds the complete trend curve. Figure 13-43: Trend (Diagram3) and track of an audio signal 13.8.6.1...
Page 657 ® Protocol analysis R&S Audio signals (option R&S RTE-K5) 6. Select the "Result Analysis" tab. 7. Under "Long term", select "Enable". An empty trend diagram is displayed. 8. Tap "Horizontal scaling". 9. Set the scale mode to "Measurements" and the number of "Measurements/point" to...
Page 658: Option R&S Rte-K6)
13. If you want to change the vertical scaling of the trend curve, disable "Continuous auto scale" and adjust "Vertical scale" and "Vertical offset". 13.9 MIL-1553 (option R&S RTE-K6) 13.9.1 The MIL-STD-1553 The MIL-STD-1553 specification defines the characteristics of a serial data bus origi- nally designed for use in the military avionics.
Page 659 ® Protocol analysis R&S MIL-1553 (option R&S RTE-K6) Command Word Figure 13-44: Structure of a command word The format of a command word consists of the following parts (see Figure 13-44): ● Sync: an invalid Manchester waveform. ● Remote Terminal (RT) Address: the unique address of the corresponding RT.
Page 660 ® Protocol analysis R&S MIL-1553 (option R&S RTE-K6) Status Word Figure 13-46: Structure of a status word The format of a status word consists of the following parts (see Figure 13-46): ● Sync: an invalid Manchester waveform. ● Remote Terminal (RT) Address: the unique address of the corresponding RT.
Page 661: Mil-Std-1553 Configuration
® Protocol analysis R&S MIL-1553 (option R&S RTE-K6) 13.9.2 MIL-STD-1553 configuration 13.9.2.1 MIL-STD-1553 configuration settings Access: [PROTOCOL] > "Decode" tab > "Protocol" = MIL-STD-1553 Make sure that the tab of the correct serial bus is selected on the left side.
Page 662 ® Protocol analysis R&S MIL-1553 (option R&S RTE-K6) Thresholds Threshold values are used for digitization of the signal. Sets the threshold value for digitization of signals for each line. If the signal value on the line is higher than the threshold, the signal state is high (1 or true for the Boolean logic).
Page 663: Configuring Mil-Std-1553
® Protocol analysis R&S MIL-1553 (option R&S RTE-K6) Remote command: on page 1607 BUS<m>:MILStd:MAXResponse:BITS on page 1607 BUS<m>:MILStd:MAXResponse:SELect on page 1616 TRIGger<m>:MILStd:MAXResponse:BITS on page 1617 TRIGger<m>:MILStd:MAXResponse:SELect 13.9.2.2 Configuring MIL-STD-1553 For configuration assign the line to the input channel, set the threshold and the timing conditions.
Page 664 ® Protocol analysis R&S MIL-1553 (option R&S RTE-K6) Trigger Type Selects the trigger type for MIL-STD-1553 analysis. "Sync" Triggers on a sync impulse. "Word" Triggers on the selected word type. "Data Word" Triggers on a specified data word or data word range.
Page 665 ® Protocol analysis R&S MIL-1553 (option R&S RTE-K6) In binary format, use the following characters: 1; 0; or X (do not care). To enter the pat- tern in other formats use the bit pattern editor, see Chapter 13.1.5, "Bit pattern editor",...
Page 666 ® Protocol analysis R&S MIL-1553 (option R&S RTE-K6) Remote command: on page 1614 TRIGger<m>:MILStd:DATA:DCONdition on page 1615 TRIGger<m>:MILStd:DATA:DMAX on page 1615 TRIGger<m>:MILStd:DATA:DMIN Data Index The MIL-MIL-STD-1553 standard defines the length of a message to a series of up to 32 words. Data index sets the range within this series of the data words that is consid- ered for the analysis.
Page 667 ® Protocol analysis R&S MIL-1553 (option R&S RTE-K6) Remote command: on page 1614 TRIGger<m>:MILStd:CDST:ICONdition on page 1614 TRIGger<m>:MILStd:CDST:IMAX on page 1614 TRIGger<m>:MILStd:CDST:IMIN Subaddress/ Mode The subaddress/mode setup consists of the condition and one or two subaddress/ mode patterns. In binary format, use the following characters: 1; 0; or X (do not care). To enter the pat- tern in other formats use the bit pattern editor, see Chapter 13.1.5, "Bit pattern...
Page 668 ® Protocol analysis R&S MIL-1553 (option R&S RTE-K6) Remote command: on page 1612 TRIGger<m>:MILStd:CMD:CCONdition on page 1612 TRIGger<m>:MILStd:CMD:CMAX on page 1612 TRIGger<m>:MILStd:CMD:CMIN T/R (Transmit/receive) Toggles the data direction of the selected command: 1 (transmit), 0 (receive), or X (either). Remote command: on page 1613 TRIGger<m>:MILStd:CMD:TR...
Page 669 ® Protocol analysis R&S MIL-1553 (option R&S RTE-K6) Synchronization Error ← Error Condition Triggers if a sync impulse does not fulfill the technical requirements or when the trans- mission is not valid. Remote command: on page 1616 TRIGger<m>:MILStd:ERRor:SYNC Manchester Coding Error ← Error Condition Triggers if there is an error in the Manchester coding of the signal.
Page 670: Triggering On Mil-Std-1553
® Protocol analysis R&S MIL-1553 (option R&S RTE-K6) Max Response ← Error Condition Checks and sets a value for the maximum response time between the last bit of a word and the following status word sync. The time is measured between the mid bit zero crossings.
Page 671: Mil-Std-1553 Decode Results
® Protocol analysis R&S MIL-1553 (option R&S RTE-K6) @PROTOCOL_NAME = mil1553 0Ah,Engine,01h,Thrust 03h,Main panel,07h,Altimeter 03h,Main panel,01h,Speed 0Eh,Only RTA See also: Chapter 13.1.4, "Label lists", on page 517. Remote command: ● on page 1622 BUS<m>:MILStd:WORD<n>:SYMBol? 13.9.5 MIL-STD-1553 decode results When the configuration of the serial bus is complete, the signal can be decoded: 1.
Page 672 ® Protocol analysis R&S MIL-1553 (option R&S RTE-K6) Figure 13-47: Decoded MIL-1553 signal with applied label list and results table. The last frame con- tains an error. Table 13-10: Content of the decode result table Column Description State Overall state of the word...
Page 673: Search On Decoded Mil Data
® Protocol analysis R&S MIL-1553 (option R&S RTE-K6) Export of decode results 1. In the protocol decode table, press "Export". The "Numeric Results" dialog opens. For details, see Chapter 12.2.4, "Numeric Results", on page 492. 2. Select the decode results you want to export, the file format, and the delimiter.
Page 674 ® Protocol analysis R&S MIL-1553 (option R&S RTE-K6) Type The search criterion is defined by "Type". All trigger types are also available for search. Additional search parameters are provided under "Detailed Search Parameter Setup". "Sync" Searches for a sync impulse.
Page 675 ® Protocol analysis R&S MIL-1553 (option R&S RTE-K6) The data pattern setup settings are the same as in the MIL trigger setup, see "Data Pattern" on page 665. Remote command: on page 1626 SEARch:TRIGger:MILStd:DATA:DCONdition on page 1626 SEARch:TRIGger:MILStd:DATA:DMIN on page 1627...
Page 676: Mil Search Results
® Protocol analysis R&S MIL-1553 (option R&S RTE-K6) T/R (Transmit/receive) Specifies the data direction of the selected command. For details, see "T/R (Transmit/receive)" on page 668. Remote command: on page 1628 SEARch:TRIGger:MILStd:CMD:TR Status flags setup Specifies the values (X, 0, 1) of the status flags.
Page 677 ® Protocol analysis R&S MIL-1553 (option R&S RTE-K6) The "Show search zoom windows" function allows you to analyze the search results in more detail. Search zoom and result table are synchronized; if you select a row in the result table, this result is shown in the search zoom.
Page 678: Arinc 429 (Option R&S Rte-K7)
® Protocol analysis R&S ARINC 429 (option R&S RTE-K7) 13.10 ARINC 429 (option R&S RTE-K7) 13.10.1 ARINC 429 basics The ARINC 429 is a specification that defines the characteristics of an avionic data bus used on commercial and transport aircraft.
Page 679: Arinc 429 Configuration
® Protocol analysis R&S ARINC 429 (option R&S RTE-K7) 13.10.2 ARINC 429 configuration 13.10.2.1 ARINC 429 configuration settings Access: [PROTOCOL] > "Decode" tab > "Protocol" = ARINC 429 Make sure that the tab of the correct serial bus is selected.
Page 680 ® Protocol analysis R&S ARINC 429 (option R&S RTE-K7) Thresholds Sets the threshold value for digitization of the data signal. If the signal value on the line is higher than the threshold, the signal state is high (1 or true for the Boolean logic).
Page 681: Configuring Arinc 429 Signals
® Protocol analysis R&S ARINC 429 (option R&S RTE-K7) 13.10.2.2 Configuring ARINC 429 signals For configuration assign the line to the input channel, set the threshold and the timing conditions. For details on configuration settings, see Chapter 13.10.2.1, "ARINC 429 configuration settings",...
Page 682 ® Protocol analysis R&S ARINC 429 (option R&S RTE-K7) Make sure that: ● In the [PROTOCOL] > "Decode" tab: – The correct "Protocol" is selected. – The data sources of the serial bus are channel signals. ● In the "Trigger" > "Setup" tab: –...
Page 683 ® Protocol analysis R&S ARINC 429 (option R&S RTE-K7) Label + Data Sets the trigger on a defined word format. You can define the label, the data and the SDI / SSM bits separately. Label setup: Condition, Label Min, Label Max ← Label + Data The label setup consists of the condition and one or two label patterns.
Page 684 ® Protocol analysis R&S ARINC 429 (option R&S RTE-K7) Remote command: on page 1636 TRIGger<m>:ARINc:DATA:CONDition on page 1636 TRIGger<m>:ARINc:DATA:MIN on page 1637 TRIGger<m>:ARINc:DATA:MAX SDI / SSM ← Label + Data Sets the values for the source/destination identifier (SDI) and the sign/status matrix (SSM) bits.
Page 685: Triggering On Arinc 429
® Protocol analysis R&S ARINC 429 (option R&S RTE-K7) Remote command: on page 1634 BUS<m>:ARINc:MAXGap:BITS on page 1633 BUS<m>:ARINc:MAXGap:SELect on page 1634 BUS<m>:ARINc:MINGap:BITS on page 1634 BUS<m>:ARINc:MINGap:SELect on page 1638 TRIGger<m>:ARINc:MINGap:BITS on page 1638 TRIGger<m>:ARINc:MINGap:SELect on page 1638 TRIGger<m>:ARINc:MAXGap:BITS on page 1638 TRIGger<m>:ARINc:MAXGap:SELect...
Page 686: Arinc 429 Decode Results
® Protocol analysis R&S ARINC 429 (option R&S RTE-K7) 015o, Wind Speed 075o, Gross Weight 125o, Universal Time Coordinated # ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- See also: Chapter 13.1.4, "Label lists", on page 517. Remote command: ● on page 1642 BUS<m>:ARINc:WORD<n>:SYMBol? 13.10.5 ARINC 429 decode results When the configuration of the serial bus is complete, the signal can be decoded: 1.
Page 687 ® Protocol analysis R&S ARINC 429 (option R&S RTE-K7) Figure 13-50: Decoded ARINC 429 signal with applied label list and results table. The second and eight frames contain errors. Table 13-11: Content of the "Decode results" table Column Description State Overall state of the frame.
Page 688: Search On Decoded Arinc 429 Data
® Protocol analysis R&S ARINC 429 (option R&S RTE-K7) Export of decode results 1. In the protocol decode table, press "Export". The "Numeric Results" dialog opens. For details, see Chapter 12.2.4, "Numeric Results", on page 492. 2. Select the decode results you want to export, the file format, and the delimiter.
Page 689 ® Protocol analysis R&S ARINC 429 (option R&S RTE-K7) Type The search criterion is defined by "Type". All trigger types are also available for search. Additional search parameters are provided under "Detailed Search Parameter Setup". "Word Start" Searches for the start word.
Page 690: Arinc Search Results
® Protocol analysis R&S ARINC 429 (option R&S RTE-K7) Remote command: on page 1644 SEARch:TRIGger:ARINc:ERRor:CODing on page 1645 SEARch:TRIGger:ARINc:ERRor:PARity on page 1645 SEARch:TRIGger:ARINc:ERRor:TIMing 13.10.6.2 ARINC search results To get search results, "Enable" the search. You can minimize, shift or close the search dialog.
Page 691: Ethernet 10Base-T And 100Base-Tx (Option R&S Rte-K8)
Twisted-pair Ethernet technologies are based on the family of standards IEEE 802.3, issued by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). R&S RTE-K8 is a firmware option that enables the R&S RTE to analyze Ethernet pro- tocol variants 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX, by decoding the signal and searching within the decoded events.
Page 692: Ethernet Configuration
® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX (option R&S RTE-K8) All Ethernet-over-twisted-pair technologies use wires with four twisted pairs of cables (and 8P8C connectors), but 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX only require two pairs of wires. 13.11.2 Ethernet configuration 13.11.2.1 Ethernet configuration settings Access: [PROTOCOL] >"Decode"...
Page 693 Selects the Ethernet protocol variant 100BASE-TX, which provides 100 Mbit/s use data rate. Due to 4b/5b encoding, the raw data rate on the line is 125 Mbit/s. This value is used by R&S RTE-K8 as the bit rate default for 100BASE-TX.
Page 694 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX (option R&S RTE-K8) Polarity Defines the polarity ("Normal" or "Inverted") of the data signal. This setting is only avail- able in 10BASE-T. Remote command: on page 1649 BUS<m>:ETHernet:POLarity Thresholds Sets the threshold value for the digitization of each signal line. If the signal value on the line is higher than the upper threshold, the signal state is high.
Page 695: Ethernet Display Settings
® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX (option R&S RTE-K8) 13.11.2.2 Ethernet display settings Access: [PROTOCOL] > "Display" tab. For common display settings, see Chapter 13.1.3, "Display", on page 515. To enhance the decode possibilities of the Ethernet protocol, you can use an additional setting in the "Display"...
Page 696: Configuring Ethernet Signals
® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX (option R&S RTE-K8) 00:04:07, TopconPo 00:0B:64, KiebackP 00:1B:C5:06:C0:00/36, LuxconSy 00:1B:C5:06:D0:00/36, TesElect 00:1B:C5:06:E0:00/36, TwoDimen 00:1B:C5:06:F0:00/36, LlcEmzio 00:1F:BE, Shenzhen 00:21:8F, Avantgar 00:21:90, GoliathS 00:21:91, D-Link 00:21:92, BaodingG 00:50:C2:5F:60:00/36, Cambridg 00:50:C2:5F:70:00/36, Metrolog 00:50:C2:5F:80:00/36, GrupoEpe 18:42:2F, AlcatelL...
Page 697: Ethernet Trigger
® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX (option R&S RTE-K8) 3. In the "Decode" tab, select the protocol: "Ethernet". 4. Tap "Ethernet Variant" and select the variant ("10BASE-T" or "100BASE-TX") you want to set up. Note: Note that no triggering on the serial bus is available.
Page 698 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX (option R&S RTE-K8) Make sure that: ● In the [PROTOCOL] > "Decode" tab: – The correct "Protocol" is selected. – The data sources of the serial bus are channel signals. ● In the "Trigger" > "Setup" tab: –...
Page 699 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX (option R&S RTE-K8) "Adv frame " Triggers on an advanced frame. "Adv error" Triggers on any selected errors. Remote command: on page 1652 TRIGger<m>:ETHernet:TYPE Ethernet Variant Defines the Ethernet protocol variant and transmission speed.
Page 700 Selects the Ethernet protocol variant 100BASE-TX, which provides 100 Mbit/s use data rate. Due to 4b/5b encoding, the raw data rate on the line is 125 Mbit/s. This value is used by R&S RTE-K8 as the bit rate default for 100BASE-TX.
Page 701 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX (option R&S RTE-K8) In both variants, the permitted bit rates range from 10 kbps to 150 Mbps. Switching the variant adjusts the bit rate, independent of the previous setting. Remote command: on page 1651 BUS<m>:ETHernet:BITRate...
Page 702: Triggering On Ethernet Signals
® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX (option R&S RTE-K8) "Length/Typ Defines the length/type pattern that is required to specify a range with (Max)" conditions "In range" and "Out of range". Remote command: on page 1656 TRIGger<m>:ETHernet:FRAMe:TCONdition on page 1656 TRIGger<m>:ETHernet:FRAMe:TMAX...
Page 703: Ethernet Label List
® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX (option R&S RTE-K8) 6. Depending on the selected Ethernet variant, more setup conditions have to be specified. For information on how to proceed with the configuration settings, see Chap- ter 13.11.3.1, "Ethernet trigger settings",...
Page 704: Ethernet Decode Results
® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX (option R&S RTE-K8) 18:E7:F4, Apple 40:D8:55:1C:80:00/36, SensataT 40:D8:55:1C:90:00/36, Andy-L 40:D8:55:1C:A0:00/36, RigelEng 40:D8:55:1C:B0:00/36, MgSRL 40:D8:55:1C:D0:00/36, YxlonInt 40:D8:55:1C:E0:00/36, PeterHub 40:D8:55:1C:F0:00/36, OmnikNew 40:D8:55:1D:00:00/36, WebeasyB FC:F8:B7, TronteqE FC:FA:F7, Shanghai FC:FB:FB, Cisco FC:FE:77, HitachiR FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF/48, BroadCast See also: Chapter 13.1.4, "Label...
Page 705 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX (option R&S RTE-K8) Figure 13-56: Ethernet 10BASE-T: decoded and binary signal, with decode results table and details green brackets [...] = start / end of frame blue frame = frame ok red frame...
Page 706 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX (option R&S RTE-K8) grey = preamble / SFD / FrameCheck green = destination address purple = source address brown = address yellow = data The content of the "Decode results" table in...
Page 707: Search On Decoded Ethernet Data
® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX (option R&S RTE-K8) ● Chapter 7.1.3, "Zooming for details", on page 284 Export of decode results 1. In the protocol decode table, press "Export". The "Numeric Results" dialog opens. For details, see Chapter 12.2.4, "Numeric...
Page 708 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX (option R&S RTE-K8) Type Define the event types to be searched. Available event types are "Frame" and "Error". Remote command: on page 1662 SEARch:TRIGger:ETHernet:FRAMe:SELect on page 1667 SEARch:TRIGger:ETHernet:ERRor:SELect Frame Searches for the following frame conditions: "Destination address", "Source address", "Length/Type", or "Frame check".
Page 709: Ethernet Search Results
® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX (option R&S RTE-K8) Remote command: on page 1666 SEARch:TRIGger:ETHernet:FRAMe:CCONdition on page 1666 SEARch:TRIGger:ETHernet:FRAMe:CMIN on page 1666 SEARch:TRIGger:ETHernet:FRAMe:CMAX Error Condition Searches for the following error conditions: "Preamble Error" or "Length Error". Preamble Error ← Error Condition Searches for any preamble errors.
Page 710: Searching Ethernet Data
707. 5. To acquire a waveform, press [RUN N× SINGLE]. The R&S RTE performs an Ethernet decode according to the thresholds and proto- col settings of the associated serial bus source (here in our example SB1). 6. To start searching the acquired waveform for specific events, tap "Enable" in the search setup dialog: The R&S RTE displays the "Search Results"...
Page 711: Ethernet 100Base-T1 (Option R&S Rte-57)
Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 100BASE-T1 (option R&S RTE-57) 13.12 Ethernet 100BASE-T1 (option R&S RTE-57) 100BASE-T1 is an Ethernet based protocol specialized for the needs of the automotive industry, such as in the automotive networking applications, enabling advanced safety, comfort and infotainment features within the automobile.
Page 712: 100Base-T1 Configuration
® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 100BASE-T1 (option R&S RTE-57) – Data scrambling is carried out via a sidestream scramble to randomize the sequence of transmitted symbols and avoid the presence of spectral lines in the signal spectrum PAM-3 has a higher spectral efficiency that limits the signaling bandwidth to 33.3 MHz instead of 65 MHz to 80 MHz in 1000BASE-T and 100BASE-TX such that communication occurs in the best part of a twisted-pair channel.
Page 713 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 100BASE-T1 (option R&S RTE-57) See also: Chapter 13.1.1, "Decode - general settings", on page 514. Forward Defines the forward signal settings. You can choose between a differential and single-ended signal and set the forward source channel for the waveform. Only analog channels are available for selection.
Page 714: 100Base-T1 Display Settings
® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 100BASE-T1 (option R&S RTE-57) The effective signal amplitude passed to the decoder is: Remote command: on page 1672 BUS<m>:HBTO:ATTN Polarity Selects the polarity of the data signal. You can select between "Normal" and "Inverted". For "Normal" polarity, active high is defined as +1 V and active low is defined as -1 V.
Page 715: Configuring 100Base-T1 Signals
® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 100BASE-T1 (option R&S RTE-57) For common display settings, see Chapter 13.1.3, "Display", on page 515. To enhance the decode possibilities of the 100BASE-T1 protocol, you can use an addi- tional setting in the "Display" tab: "Decode layer".
Page 716: 100Base-T1 Trigger
® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 100BASE-T1 (option R&S RTE-57) 2. Select the tab of the bus you want to set up, for example "SB1". 3. In the "Decode" tab, select the protocol: "100BASE-T1". 4. Select the type and source for the reversed and forward signal.
Page 717 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 100BASE-T1 (option R&S RTE-57) Make sure that: ● In the [PROTOCOL] > "Decode" tab: – The correct "Protocol" is selected. – The data sources of the serial bus are channel signals. ● In the "Trigger" > "Setup" tab: –...
Page 718 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 100BASE-T1 (option R&S RTE-57) Destination address Sets the specified destination address to be triggered on. The destination address setup consists of the condition and one or two data patterns. The destination address corresponds to the address of the interface in the device that receives the frame.
Page 719 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 100BASE-T1 (option R&S RTE-57) Remote command: on page 1678 TRIGger<m>:HBTO:SADDress:CONDition on page 1678 TRIGger<m>:HBTO:SADDress:MIN on page 1679 TRIGger<m>:HBTO:SADDress:MAX Length/Type Sets the specified Length/Type to be triggered on. The Length/Type setup consists of the condition and one or two data patterns.
Page 720 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 100BASE-T1 (option R&S RTE-57) Data Sets the specified data to be triggered on. The data setup consists of the condition and one or two data patterns. "Condition" Defines the operator to set a specific data, e.g. "Equal" or "Not Equal") or a range.
Page 721: Triggering On 100Base-T1
® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 100BASE-T1 (option R&S RTE-57) SFD Error ← Errors Triggers on a frame with invalid Start Frame Delimiter (SFD). Remote command: on page 1683 TRIGger<m>:HBTO:ERRor:SFD 13.12.3.2 Triggering on 100BASE-T1 Prerequisite: A bus is configured for the 100BASE-T1 signal to be analyzed.
Page 722 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 100BASE-T1 (option R&S RTE-57) The color-coding of the various protocol sections and errors simplifies the interpretation of the visual display. The decode information condenses or expands, depending on the horizontal scale. Various data formats are available to show the result values.
Page 723 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 100BASE-T1 (option R&S RTE-57) Figure 13-60: 100BASE-T1 decode results table and details The content of the "Decode results" table in Figure 13-60 is described in Table 13-13: Table 13-13: Content of the "Decode results" table...
Page 724: Search On Decoded 100Base-T1 Data
® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 100BASE-T1 (option R&S RTE-57) For an introduction to zoom settings and setup, see: ● Chapter 7.1.2, "Zoom settings", on page 280 ● Chapter 7.1.3, "Zooming for details", on page 284 Data format You can select various data formats for the values displayed in the decode table and in the combs of the decoded signal.
Page 725 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 100BASE-T1 (option R&S RTE-57) Type Selects the search type for 100BASE-T1 analysis. Remote command: on page 1689 SEARch:TRIGger:HBTO:TYPE Frame Start ← Type Searches for the start of frame. MAC Frame ← Type Searches for a Media Access Control (MAC) frame that matches the specified...
Page 726 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 100BASE-T1 (option R&S RTE-57) FILLER ← Type Searches for a Filler frame. The frame is used to maintain transmission activity. IDLE ← Type Searches for an idle frame. The frame is used for clock synchronization.
Page 727 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 100BASE-T1 (option R&S RTE-57) Length/Type Sets the specified Length/Type to be searched for. The Length/Type setup consists of the condition and one or two data patterns. The value in this field indicates the manner in which the field is being used, either as a length or type field.
Page 728 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 100BASE-T1 (option R&S RTE-57) "Condition" Defines the operator to set a specific data, e.g. "Equal" or "Not Equal") or a range. "Data Min/Data" Defines the bit pattern of the data pattern. In binary format, use the following characters: 1; 0; or X (do not care).
Page 729: 100Base-T1 Search Results
® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 100BASE-T1 (option R&S RTE-57) Remote command: on page 1696 SEARch:TRIGger:HBTO:ERRor:SFD 13.12.6.2 100BASE-T1 search results To get search results, "Enable" the search. You can minimize, shift or close the search dialog. The search results are listed in the search result table and marked in the waveform by blue lines.
Page 730: Sent (Option R&S Rte-K10)
6. To start searching the acquired waveform for specific events, tap "Enable" in the search setup dialog. The R&S RTE displays the "Search Results" box that lists the detected events. For information on how to configure the search results presentation and how to navi- gate the search results, see also "To display search zoom windows"...
Page 731: Sent Transmission Concept
® Protocol analysis R&S SENT (option R&S RTE-K10) SENT operates via a three wire connection, a signal line, a supply voltage line for the sensor and a ground line. It transmits data digitally in variable timing units and evalu- ates the time between two falling edges (single edges). The signal is amplitude modu- lated with a constant amplitude voltage.
Page 732: Sent Message Definitions
® Protocol analysis R&S SENT (option R&S RTE-K10) 13.13.1.2 SENT message definitions SENT terms See the specific terms and definition used in SENT protocol: ● Tick (clock tick): basic unit of time – transmitter-specific nominal clock period 3 µs < clock tick <90 µs, with max. 20 % clock variation –...
Page 733: Sent Slow Channel
® Protocol analysis R&S SENT (option R&S RTE-K10) ● Data Pulses (Nibbles) – one up to six 4 bit data nibbles – 12 to 27 clock ticks pulse period initial logic 0 time with ≥5 ticks, subsequent logical 1 with variable duration –...
Page 734: Trigger
12 bit data and 8 bit message ID Trigger The R&S RTE can trigger on various parts of SENT pulses. The data line must be con- nected to an input channel, triggering on math and reference waveforms is not possi- ble.
Page 735 ® Protocol analysis R&S SENT (option R&S RTE-K10) See also: Chapter 13.1.1, "Decode - general settings", on page 514. Data Sets the source of the data line. Usually, the source is one of the analog channels. Reference and math waveforms are available as source if the trigger source is one of the analog channels but not the serial bus.
Page 736 ® Protocol analysis R&S SENT (option R&S RTE-K10) Remote command: on page 1703 BUS<m>:SENT:DATA:THReshold on page 1703 BUS<m>:SENT:TECHnology on page 1421 BUS<m>:SETReflevels on page 1421 BUS<m>:FAUToset Clock Period Sets the transmitter-specific nominal clock period (clock tick). The clock period and signal length determine the speed of transmission.
Page 737: Configuring Sent Protocol
"Yes" Pause pulse with fixed length at the end of each transmission sequence. The R&S RTE computes the length of the pause pulse automatically. "For constant frame length" Pause pulse with dynamic length to maintain a fixed transmission sequence length.
Page 738: Sent Trigger
Type Selects the event of the SENT transmission sequence or message to be triggered on. The RTE triggers always on the falling edge of a pulse, i.e. at the end of the selected type nibble in a transmission sequence. User Manual 1326.1032.02 ─ 20...
Page 739 ® Protocol analysis R&S SENT (option R&S RTE-K10) "Calibration or Sync" Triggers at the end of the "Synchronization/Calibration" pulse. This setting does not require any input parameters. "Transmission Sequence" Triggering depends on the additional selectable "Sequence" parame- ter: ● "Sequence > Status": triggers at the end of the "Status" nibble.
Page 740 ® Protocol analysis R&S SENT (option R&S RTE-K10) "Serial Message" Triggering on a serial message depends on the serial protocol selected with Serial protocol > Short | Enhanced and the associated setting parameters: ● "Short" serial message – "Sequence > Identifier": triggers at the end of the "ID".
Page 741 ® Protocol analysis R&S SENT (option R&S RTE-K10) Note: The displayed parameters depend on the selected "Sequence". The instrument displays the data setting parameters when you select "Status+Data", see "Type" on page 738. Figure 13-63: Trigger setting parameters of a transmission sequence Sequence ←...
Page 742 ® Protocol analysis R&S SENT (option R&S RTE-K10) Data min ← Transmission Sequence setup Sets the data pattern. Enter the bytes in msb first bit order. The maximum pattern length is 64 bit. Waveform data is compared with the pattern byte-by-byte.
Page 743 ® Protocol analysis R&S SENT (option R&S RTE-K10) ● Less or equal, Greater or equal ● In range, Out of range Remote command: on page 1709 TRIGger<m>:SENT:SICN Identifier min ← Serial Message setup Defines the bit pattern of the message identifier.
Page 744: Triggering On Sent Signals
® Protocol analysis R&S SENT (option R&S RTE-K10) Error conditions setup Executes a trigger event if one or more of the following errors occur: ● "Form Error" Detects a form error in serial messages (short and enhanced). An error occurs when at least one of the transmission sequences that form a serial message has an error.
Page 745: Sent Label List
® Protocol analysis R&S SENT (option R&S RTE-K10) 1. Press the [PROTOCOL] key and select the "Trigger" tab. 2. Press the "Select" button. The "Source" button is shown. 3. Tap the "Source" button and select the "Serial bus" trigger source.
Page 746 ® Protocol analysis R&S SENT (option R&S RTE-K10)  <sb:BIT-POSITION>11</sb:BIT-POSITION>  <sb:BIT-LENGTH>12</sb:BIT-LENGTH> ...
Page 747: Sent Label List Translation Example
® Protocol analysis R&S SENT (option R&S RTE-K10) Figure 13-64: SENT decode results with label list translation Remote command: ● on page 1717 BUS<m>:SENT:FRAMe<n>:SYMBol? ● on page 1717 BUS<m>:SENT:FRAMe<n>:SDATa? ● on page 1717 BUS<m>:SENT:FRAMe<n>:SDEXport? 13.13.4.1 SENT label list translation example The example shows the xml sequence for a label list translation in the SENT protocol: User Manual 1326.1032.02 ─...
Page 748 ® Protocol analysis R&S SENT (option R&S RTE-K10) Figure 13-65: SENT label list translation <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <sb:LABEL-LIST-FILE> <sb:PROJECT ID="SENT-TRANSLATION SYSTEM"> <sb:SHORT-NAME>SENT</sb:SHORT-NAME> <sb:LONG-NAME>SENT-Translation System Demo</sb:LONG-NAME> <sb:DESCRIPTION>This is the database for Translation demo for SENT.</sb:DESCRIPTION> </sb:PROJECT> <sb:FRAMES> <sb:FRAME NAME="Air Temperature" STATE="ON">...
Page 749 ® Protocol analysis R&S SENT (option R&S RTE-K10) <sb:DESCRIPTION></sb:DESCRIPTION> <sb:ID-VALUE>04</sb:ID-VALUE> <sb:ID-LENGTH>8</sb:ID-LENGTH> <sb:DATA-SIZE>12</sb:DATA-SIZE> </sb:FRAME> <sb:FRAME NAME="Manufacturer Code" STATE="OFF"> <sb:DESCRIPTION></sb:DESCRIPTION> <sb:ID-VALUE>05</sb:ID-VALUE> <sb:ID-LENGTH>8</sb:ID-LENGTH> <sb:DATA-SIZE>12</sb:DATA-SIZE> </sb:FRAME> <sb:FRAME NAME="Sensor Type" STATE="ON"> <sb:DESCRIPTION>specifies the SENT Sensor Type</sb:DESCRIPTION> <sb:ID-VALUE>03</sb:ID-VALUE> <sb:ID-LENGTH>8</sb:ID-LENGTH> <sb:DATA-SIZE>12</sb:DATA-SIZE> <sb:SIGNALS> <sb:SIGNAL ID="Sensor Class"> <sb:SHORT-NAME>Sensor Class</sb:SHORT-NAME>...
Page 750 ® Protocol analysis R&S SENT (option R&S RTE-K10) <sb:FRAME NAME="SENT Standard Revision" STATE="ON"> <sb:SHORT-NAME>SENT Standard</sb:SHORT-NAME> <sb:DESCRIPTION>specifies the SENT Standard Revision Number</sb:DESCRIPTION> <sb:ID-VALUE>10</sb:ID-VALUE> <sb:ID-LENGTH>4</sb:ID-LENGTH> <sb:DATA-SIZE>8</sb:DATA-SIZE> <sb:SIGNALS> <sb:SIGNAL ID="Revision"> <sb:SHORT-NAME>Revision</sb:SHORT-NAME> <sb:DESCRIPTION>SENT-Standard Revision Number</sb:DESCRIPTION> <sb:BIT-POSITION>7</sb:BIT-POSITION> <sb:BIT-LENGTH>8</sb:BIT-LENGTH> <sb:BYTE-ORDER>MSB</sb:BYTE-ORDER> <sb:VALUE-TYPE>ENUM</sb:VALUE-TYPE> <sb:FACTOR>1.0</sb:FACTOR> <sb:OFFSET>0.0</sb:OFFSET> <sb:MIN>0</sb:MIN> <sb:MAX>4.0</sb:MAX> <sb:ENUM-VALUES>...
Page 751 ® R&S Protocol analysis SENT (option R&S RTE-K10) <sb:ENUM INDEX="5" LABEL="Channel 2 out of range low"/> <sb:ENUM INDEX="6" LABEL="Initialization Error (Channel 2)"/> <sb:ENUM INDEX="7" LABEL="Channel 1 and 2 Rationality Error"/> <sb:ENUM INDEX="1025" LABEL="Slow Channel Temperature out of range high"/> <sb:ENUM INDEX="1026" LABEL="Slow Channel Temperature out of range low"/>...
Page 752 ® Protocol analysis R&S SENT (option R&S RTE-K10) <sb:SIGNALS> <sb:SIGNAL ID="Channel_1"> <sb:SHORT-NAME>TPS1</sb:SHORT-NAME> <sb:DESCRIPTION>""</sb:DESCRIPTION> <sb:BIT-POSITION>23</sb:BIT-POSITION> <sb:BIT-LENGTH>12</sb:BIT-LENGTH> <sb:BYTE-ORDER>MSB</sb:BYTE-ORDER> <sb:VALUE-TYPE>UNSIGNED_INT</sb:VALUE-TYPE> <sb:FACTOR>1.0</sb:FACTOR> <sb:OFFSET>0.0</sb:OFFSET> <sb:MIN>0</sb:MIN> <sb:MAX>10000.0</sb:MAX> <sb:UNIT></sb:UNIT> </sb:SIGNAL> <sb:SIGNAL ID="Channel_2"> <sb:SHORT-NAME>TPS2</sb:SHORT-NAME> <sb:DESCRIPTION>""</sb:DESCRIPTION> <sb:BIT-POSITION>11</sb:BIT-POSITION> <sb:BIT-LENGTH>12</sb:BIT-LENGTH> <sb:BYTE-ORDER>LSB</sb:BYTE-ORDER> <sb:FACTOR>1.0</sb:FACTOR> <sb:OFFSET>0.0</sb:OFFSET> <sb:MIN>0</sb:MIN> <sb:MAX>10000.0</sb:MAX> <sb:UNIT></sb:UNIT> </sb:SIGNAL> </sb:SIGNALS> </sb:FRAME> <sb:FRAME NAME="Mass Air Flow (16)" STATE="OFF">...
Page 753 ® Protocol analysis R&S SENT (option R&S RTE-K10) <sb:SIGNAL ID="Channel_1"> <sb:SHORT-NAME>MAF</sb:SHORT-NAME> <sb:DESCRIPTION>""</sb:DESCRIPTION> <sb:BIT-POSITION>23</sb:BIT-POSITION> <sb:BIT-LENGTH>16</sb:BIT-LENGTH> <sb:BYTE-ORDER>MSB</sb:BYTE-ORDER> <sb:FACTOR>1.0</sb:FACTOR> <sb:OFFSET>0.0</sb:OFFSET> <sb:MIN>0</sb:MIN> <sb:MAX>10000.0</sb:MAX> <sb:UNIT></sb:UNIT> </sb:SIGNAL> <sb:SIGNAL ID="Channel_2"> <sb:SHORT-NAME>Pressure</sb:SHORT-NAME> <sb:DESCRIPTION>""</sb:DESCRIPTION> <sb:BIT-POSITION>7</sb:BIT-POSITION> <sb:BIT-LENGTH>8</sb:BIT-LENGTH> <sb:BYTE-ORDER>LSB</sb:BYTE-ORDER> <sb:FACTOR>1.0</sb:FACTOR> <sb:OFFSET>0.0</sb:OFFSET> <sb:MIN>0</sb:MIN> <sb:MAX>10000.0</sb:MAX> <sb:UNIT></sb:UNIT> </sb:SIGNAL> </sb:SIGNALS> </sb:FRAME> <sb:FRAME NAME="Mass Air Flow (14/10)" STATE="OFF">...
Page 754 ® Protocol analysis R&S SENT (option R&S RTE-K10) <sb:MIN>0</sb:MIN> <sb:MAX>10000.0</sb:MAX> <sb:UNIT></sb:UNIT> </sb:SIGNAL> </sb:SIGNALS> </sb:FRAME> <sb:FRAME NAME="Single Secure Sensor" STATE="OFF"> <sb:SHORT-NAME>SSS</sb:SHORT-NAME> <sb:DATA-SIZE>24</sb:DATA-SIZE> <sb:SIGNALS> <sb:SIGNAL ID="Channel_1"> <sb:SHORT-NAME>Ch1</sb:SHORT-NAME> <sb:DESCRIPTION>""</sb:DESCRIPTION> <sb:BIT-POSITION>23</sb:BIT-POSITION> <sb:BIT-LENGTH>12</sb:BIT-LENGTH> <sb:BYTE-ORDER>MSB</sb:BYTE-ORDER> <sb:FACTOR>1.0</sb:FACTOR> <sb:OFFSET>0.0</sb:OFFSET> <sb:MIN>0</sb:MIN> <sb:MAX>10000.0</sb:MAX> <sb:UNIT></sb:UNIT> </sb:SIGNAL> <sb:SIGNAL ID="Channel_2"> <sb:SHORT-NAME>Counter</sb:SHORT-NAME> <sb:DESCRIPTION>""</sb:DESCRIPTION> <sb:BIT-POSITION>11</sb:BIT-POSITION>...
Page 755 ® Protocol analysis R&S SENT (option R&S RTE-K10) <sb:UNIT></sb:UNIT> </sb:SIGNAL> <sb:SIGNAL ID="Channel_2"> <sb:SHORT-NAME>Pressure2</sb:SHORT-NAME> <sb:DESCRIPTION>""</sb:DESCRIPTION> <sb:BIT-POSITION>11</sb:BIT-POSITION> <sb:BIT-LENGTH>12</sb:BIT-LENGTH> <sb:BYTE-ORDER>LSB</sb:BYTE-ORDER> <sb:FACTOR>1.0</sb:FACTOR> <sb:OFFSET>0.0</sb:OFFSET> <sb:MIN>0</sb:MIN> <sb:MAX>10000.0</sb:MAX> <sb:UNIT></sb:UNIT> </sb:SIGNAL> </sb:SIGNALS> </sb:FRAME> <sb:FRAME NAME="Pressure and Temperature Sensor" STATE="OFF"> <sb:SHORT-NAME>P/T</sb:SHORT-NAME> <sb:DATA-SIZE>24</sb:DATA-SIZE> <sb:SIGNALS> <sb:SIGNAL ID="Channel_1"> <sb:SHORT-NAME>Pressure</sb:SHORT-NAME> <sb:DESCRIPTION>""</sb:DESCRIPTION> <sb:BIT-POSITION>23</sb:BIT-POSITION> <sb:BIT-LENGTH>12</sb:BIT-LENGTH>...
Page 756: Sent Decode Results
® Protocol analysis R&S SENT (option R&S RTE-K10) <sb:SIGNAL ID="Channel_1"> <sb:SHORT-NAME>Pressure</sb:SHORT-NAME> <sb:DESCRIPTION>""</sb:DESCRIPTION> <sb:BIT-POSITION>23</sb:BIT-POSITION> <sb:BIT-LENGTH>12</sb:BIT-LENGTH> <sb:BYTE-ORDER>MSB</sb:BYTE-ORDER> <sb:FACTOR>1.0</sb:FACTOR> <sb:OFFSET>0.0</sb:OFFSET> <sb:MIN>0</sb:MIN> <sb:MAX>10000.0</sb:MAX> <sb:UNIT></sb:UNIT> </sb:SIGNAL> <sb:SIGNAL ID="Channel_2"> <sb:SHORT-NAME>Counter</sb:SHORT-NAME> <sb:DESCRIPTION>""</sb:DESCRIPTION> <sb:BIT-POSITION>11</sb:BIT-POSITION> <sb:BIT-LENGTH>8</sb:BIT-LENGTH> <sb:BYTE-ORDER>MSB</sb:BYTE-ORDER> <sb:FACTOR>1.0</sb:FACTOR> <sb:OFFSET>0.0</sb:OFFSET> <sb:MIN>0</sb:MIN> <sb:MAX>10000.0</sb:MAX> <sb:UNIT></sb:UNIT> </sb:SIGNAL> </sb:SIGNALS> </sb:FRAME> </sb:FRAMES> </sb:LABEL-LIST-FILE> 13.13.5 SENT decode results When the configuration of the serial bus is complete, the signal can be decoded: 1.
Page 757 ® Protocol analysis R&S SENT (option R&S RTE-K10) Figure 13-66: SENT decode results display Figure 13-67: SENT decode results of a short serial message User Manual 1326.1032.02 ─ 20...
Page 758 ® Protocol analysis R&S SENT (option R&S RTE-K10) Figure 13-68: SENT decode results of an enhanced serial message Table 13-15: Content of the decode result table Column Description State Overall state of the frame Start Time of frame start in relation to the trigger point...
Page 759: Search On Decoded Sent Data
® Protocol analysis R&S SENT (option R&S RTE-K10) For an introduction to zoom settings and setup, see: ● Chapter 7.1.2, "Zoom settings", on page 280 ● Chapter 7.1.3, "Zooming for details", on page 284 Data format You can select various data formats for the values displayed in the decode table and in the combs of the decoded signal.
Page 760 ® Protocol analysis R&S SENT (option R&S RTE-K10) Search types Enable the events to be searched for. Unlike triggering, where you can trigger only on one defined event, you can search for various different events in one search. "Calibration Sync"...
Page 761 ® Protocol analysis R&S SENT (option R&S RTE-K10) "Error Condition" Searches for the end of certain error events. Description of trigger type specific settings: "Error conditions setup" on page 764 Remote command: on page 1719 SEARch:TRIGger:SENT:CALibration on page 1720 SEARch:TRIGger:SENT:TRANsmission...
Page 762 ® Protocol analysis R&S SENT (option R&S RTE-K10) Condition ← Transmission Sequence setup Selects the operator to define a specific data pattern or a data range. The available operators: ● Equal, Not equal ● Less than, Greater than ● Less or equal, Greater or equal ●...
Page 763 ® Protocol analysis R&S SENT (option R&S RTE-K10) Sequence ← Serial Message setup Selects the condition for searching in a serial message. You can search for the end of an identifier nibble or the combination of the identifier and data nibble(s).
Page 764 ® Protocol analysis R&S SENT (option R&S RTE-K10) Data min ← Serial Message setup Sets the data pattern. Enter the bytes in msb first bit order. The maximum pattern length is 64 bit. Waveform data is compared with the pattern byte-by-byte.
Page 765: Sent Search Results
® Protocol analysis R&S SENT (option R&S RTE-K10) 13.13.6.2 SENT search results To get search results, "Enable" the search. You can minimize, shift or close the search dialog. The search results are listed in the search result table and marked in the waveform by blue lines.
Page 766: Custom: Manchester / Nrz (Option R&S Rte-K50)M
SEARch:RESult:SENT:FRAMe<m>:SYNCduration? ● on page 1732 SEARch:RESult:SENT:FRAMe<m>:TYPE? 13.14 Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTE-K50)M R&S RTE-K50 is a firmware option that enables the R&S RTE to analyze customizable serial bus signals encoded by the following coding standards: ● Manchester ●...
Page 767: Special Features Of Manchester Coding
"overhead" edge. The center of the bit is then marked by a second transition, which is a "sampling" edge. Some Manchester implementations, however, sample the first bit on the first edge. The option R&S RTE-K50 attempts to automatically detect this situation. Unfortunately, it is possible to trick the algorithm with waveforms that contain many (legitimate) violations.
Page 768: Custom: Manchester / Nrz Configuration
Bit Rate Typically, a single bit rate is clearly specified in Manchester protocols; however, some implementations use a variable bit rate. By default, R&S RTE-K50 automatically deter- mines the bit rate with no user input required. However, there are fundamental ambigu- ities possible in Manchester, if the bitrate is unknown.
Page 769 ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTE-K50)M See also: Chapter 13.1.1, "Decode - general settings", on page 514. Coding Standard To define the coding of the custom serial bus to be analyzed, select one of the follow- ing standards: "Manchester"...
Page 770 ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTE-K50)M "NRZ Clocked" Selects the coding standard NRZ Clocked. Optional "Timing settings" is "Gap time" (default: disabled, 10 µs), as shown in Figure 13-74. Figure 13-74: Custom serial bus coding configuration NRZ clocked Selects the coding standard NRZ unclocked.
Page 771 Permitted source selections are the analog, mathematical, reference and digital chan- nels. Digital channels can be only used if MSO option R&S RTE-B1 is installed. Digital and analog channels cannot be used at the same time. For triggering on the serial bus, when the NRZ clocked coding standard is selected, analog or digital channel sources are required.
Page 772 ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTE-K50)M "Idle low" The base value of the clock is "0"; after an idle period, the data signal starts with a low-to-high transition. "Idle high" The base value of the clock is "1"; after an idle period, the data signal starts with a high-to-low transition.
Page 773 ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTE-K50)M ● "First Edge" At "Idle" = "low": data are captured on the clock's rising edge (low-to-high transition) and propagated on a falling edge ● At "Idle" = "high": data are captured on the clock's falling edge (high-to-low transition) and propagated on a rising edge "Second Edge"...
Page 774 ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTE-K50)M There are four ways to set the threshold: "Threshold" Directly sets the threshold values. ● For Manchester: upper threshold in the upper field, lower thresh- old in the lower field.
Page 775 ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTE-K50)M ● "Couple For Manchester and Manchester II coding, the upper and lower thresholds" thresholds are coupled to voltage values with the same magni- tude but opposite sign (positive for the upper threshold and nega- tive for the lower threshold).
Page 776: Frame Format Configuration
® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTE-K50)M Remote command: on page 1742 BUS<m>:CMSB:GAPTime:VALue 13.14.2.2 Frame format configuration This dialog enables you to describe the generic format and logical structure of typical protocols by creating customized frame descriptions of various structures and lengths.
Page 777 ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTE-K50)M Figure 13-77: Example of a custom "MVB" frame format description (frame 1 of 2) Figure 13-78: Example of a custom "ProfiBus Voltage" frame format description (frame 1 of 3)
Page 778 ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTE-K50)M Figure 13-79: Example of a crc, parity and block frame conditions Frames A frame format description (or frame description, for short) is represented by one "page" in this dialog. It can be created by clicking on "Add". If one or several frame descriptions already exist, the new frame description is then created at the end of the frame format description list (or frame list, for short).
Page 779 ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTE-K50)M If no user-defined frame description should be suitable to identify an incoming frame, per default such a "missed" frame is reproduced as "Undescribed Bits" in the honey- comb display, as in the example in Figure 13-86.
Page 780 ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTE-K50)M Remote command: on page 1744 BUS<m>:CMSB:FRAMe<n>:CCOunt? on page 1744 BUS<m>:CMSB:FRAMe<n>:APPend Cell Name The strings in the column title describe cell names. They do not have to be unique; cell names are just for user support.
Page 781 ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTE-K50)M "= (equal)" The equal operator (represented by the "=" sign) defines a pattern for the cell to match. Valid condition entries are characters that match the cell's defined Numeric...
Page 782 ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTE-K50)M "[ ] (array)" The array operator (represented by the "[" and "]" bracket signs) defines the number of permissible repetitions of the cell. Example: Fixed-Length Array: [n] The length parameter "n" is a decimal number > 0, which determines that the cell is repeated n times within the frame.
Page 783 ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTE-K50)M "crc5usb(n-m)" The crc 5-bit operator performs a check for a 5\-bit CRC function using the polynomial as defined by the USB standard. n and m define the index range for the CRC check.
Page 784 ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTE-K50)M Remote command: on page 1745 BUS<m>:CMSB:FRAMe<n>:CELL<o>:FORMat Bit Order This defines, in which order the bits of a cell's Condition value are evaluated: either the most significant bit (MSB) or the least significant bit (LSB) first. Since the bit order is considered for the interpretation of the condition, you should specify MSB or LSB cor- rectly.
Page 785: Xml Syntax
Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTE-K50)M Note: To see more than the three selected results, bring up a full list of the states and values of all cells by activating "Show details" in the decode table dialog. For an exam-...
Page 786 ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTE-K50)M <?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> Root Element: <FrameDescription xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance" Version="1" xsi:noNamespaceSchemaLocation=".\Schema\FrameDescription.xsd"> The root element contains the "Frame Description" attributes, including a link for the fileFrameDescription.xsd. This schema file, which is installed in the system, ena- bles the software to validate an XML file before opening it.
Page 787: Custom: Manchester / Nrz Display Settings
® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTE-K50)M 13.14.2.4 Custom: Manchester / NRZ display settings Access: [PROTOCOL] > "Display" tab. For common display settings, see Chapter 13.1.3, "Display", on page 515. To enhance the decode possibilities of the custom serial protocol, you can use an addi- tional setting in the "Display"...
Page 788: Custom: Manchester / Nrz Trigger
® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTE-K50)M Note: For triggering on a custom serial bus, analog input channels are required. 5. Switch back to the "Decode" tab. 6. Tap "Coding Standard" and select the coding ("Manchester", "Manchester II", "NRZ Clocked", or "NRZ Unclocked") you want to set up.
Page 789 ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTE-K50)M Figure 13-82: Custom serial bus trigger settings, here with NRZ Clocked and Pattern selected Make sure that: ● In the [PROTOCOL] > "Decode" tab: – The correct "Protocol" is selected.
Page 790 ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTE-K50)M Figure 13-83: Custom serial bus: setting the trigger to frame start Pattern ← Type Specifies the pattern match conditions for a payload data check. The trigger is set to the first occurrence of a matching data bit pattern (which can be freely specified), start- ing after the minimum gap time, and after the detected start of the data frame.
Page 791 ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTE-K50)M "Bit index" Sets the bit index (data position), or the start value of a bit index range. Default bit index value is 0, permitted values range from 0 to 65535.
Page 792 ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTE-K50)M Frame type ← Advanced Selects the frame type for the custom bus trigger analysis. You can define individual checking parameters for the fields listed in the "Trigger type dependent settings".
Page 793: Triggering On Custom Manchester / Nrz Serial Bus
® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTE-K50)M "Condition" Defining a specific index or an index range requires to set the opera- tor to one of the following conditions: equal, in range. "Min" Specifies the index or sets the start value of an index range.
Page 794 ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTE-K50)M Frame type Selects the frame type for the custom bus filtering. You can define individual checking parameters for the fields listed in the "Trigger type dependent settings". To specify these parameters, select a field from this list and define the data and/or index operators and values, or the bit state.
Page 795: Custom: Manchester / Nrz Decode Results
® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTE-K50)M This function is avalible only for array fields, see "Condition" on page 780. "Condition" Defining a specific index or an index range requires to set the opera- tor to one of the following conditions: equal, in range.
Page 796 ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTE-K50)M ● Each cell (row) is displayed as a honeycomb cell with the name in the header line line in the honeycomb) and the formatted content in the value line (3 line in the honeycomb).
Page 797 ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTE-K50)M Table 13-16: Content of the "Decode results" table Column Description State Overall state of the frame: either OK or the relevant error condition (e.g. preamble, length) Start Start time of the frame...
Page 798: Search On Decoded Custom Manchester / Nrz Data
® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTE-K50)M In the result presentation, frames labeled "Undescribed Bits" (as in Figure 13-86) show the bit patterns that are not matched by any user defined frame format description. Showing these raw bits is a functionality to help you develop suitable frame format descriptions.
Page 799: Custom Manchester / Nrz Search Setup
® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTE-K50)M 13.14.6.1 Custom Manchester / NRZ search setup Access: [SEARCH] > "Setup" tab Search criteria Use the "Search criteria" dialog to define the event types to be searched. Available event types are "Frame" and "Error".
Page 800: Custom Serial Bus Search Results
® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTE-K50)M on page 1766 SEARch:TRIGger:CMSB:BIT on page 1766 SEARch:TRIGger:CMSB:FRAMe<m>:FLD<n>:DMAX on page 1766 SEARch:TRIGger:CMSB:DMAX on page 1767 SEARch:TRIGger:CMSB:FRAMe<m>:FLD<n>:DMIN on page 1767 SEARch:TRIGger:CMSB:DMIN on page 1767 SEARch:TRIGger:CMSB:FRAMe<m>:FLD<n>:DOPerator on page 1767 SEARch:TRIGger:CMSB:DOPerator on page 1768 SEARch:TRIGger:CMSB:FRAMe<m>:FLD<n>:IMAX...
Page 801: Mdio (Option R&S Rte-K55)
799. 4. To acquire a waveform, press [RUN N× SINGLE]. The R&S RTE performs a custom serial bus decode according to the thresholds and protocol settings of the associated serial bus source (here in our example SB1).
Page 802 ® Protocol analysis R&S MDIO (option R&S RTE-K55) On physical level, MDIO is a clocked non-return-to-zero (NRZ) code similar to SPI. According to the Ethernet standard, the protocol defines two threshold levels, 2 V and 0.8 V, which establish a hysteresis.
Page 803: Mdio Configuration
R&S MDIO (option R&S RTE-K55) Instead of a specific hardware trigger, the option R&S RTE-K55 uses a predefined generic serial bus pattern trigger. It simply triggers on a bit pattern in the data stream. This is fast, but limited in the complexity of the conditions.
Page 804: Mdio Display Settings
® Protocol analysis R&S MDIO (option R&S RTE-K55) "Clock" Defines the source settings for the clock line (management data clock, MDC). Typically, select any of the analog channels "C1" – "C4" or digital channels "D0" – "D15", depending on the test application.
Page 805: Configuring Mdio Signals
® Protocol analysis R&S MDIO (option R&S RTE-K55) Access: [PROTOCOL] > "Display" tab. For common display settings, see Chapter 13.1.3, "Display", on page 515. MDIO Specific Label Settings Decode layer Selects the decode layer. Decoding is performed in several steps, and the end results are presented in the decode table.
Page 806: Mdio Trigger
® Protocol analysis R&S MDIO (option R&S RTE-K55) 6. Set the logical thresholds. Either according to technology definition with "Preset thresholds", or to an auto- matic value with "Full autoset"/ "Auto thresholds", or enter a user-defined value directly in the "Threshold" fields.
Page 807 ® Protocol analysis R&S MDIO (option R&S RTE-K55) Figure 13-89: MDIO trigger event settings dialog "Frame Start" Sets the trigger to the start of frame (SOF) field. The start of frame condition and the trigger instant is the end of the preamble.
Page 808 ® Protocol analysis R&S MDIO (option R&S RTE-K55) "Data" Sets the trigger to the data field. For more information on the data condition, see MDIO in the Ethernet standard. The trigger instant is at the end of the frame after the last data bit, as indicated in the GUI.
Page 809: Triggering On Mdio
® Protocol analysis R&S MDIO (option R&S RTE-K55) PHYAD/PRTAD ← MDIO Trigger Type Sets the physical address or port address (5 bits) of the frame pattern; available only in trigger type "Data". Remote command: on page 1780 TRIGger<m>:MDIO:PHYS REGAD/DEVAD ← MDIO Trigger Type Sets the register address or device address (5 bits) of the frame pattern;...
Page 810: Mdio Decode Results
® Protocol analysis R&S MDIO (option R&S RTE-K55) Example: MDIO label list CSV file @PROTOCOL_NAME = mdio 0x0B, KSZ9031MNX 0x0C, KSZ8051MNLU 0x0E, KSZ8721CL 0x0F, KSZ8721SL 0x1A, KSZ8721BL 0x1B, KSZ8721BT For general information on the "Label List" tab, see Chapter 13.1.4, "Label lists",...
Page 811 ® Protocol analysis R&S MDIO (option R&S RTE-K55) DEVAD, TA and DATA fields. The zoom shows both the honeycomb display and the binary decode results of that second frame. Figure 13-90: Decoded and binary MDIO signal trace, and decode results table green brackets [...] = start and end of frame...
Page 812 ® Protocol analysis R&S MDIO (option R&S RTE-K55) Column Description Operation code (= Frame type), 2 bits ● "00" = Address frame (in Clause 45, only) ● "01" = Write frame (in Clause 22 or Clause 45) ● "10" = Read frame (in Clause 22) or Post Read frame (in Clause 45) ●...
Page 813: Search On Decoded Mdio Data
® Protocol analysis R&S MDIO (option R&S RTE-K55) Data format You can select various data formats for the values displayed in the decode table and in the combs of the decoded signal. Remote command: ● on page 1422 BUS<m>:FORMat Export of decode results 1.
Page 814 ® Protocol analysis R&S MDIO (option R&S RTE-K55) Available event types are "Frame Start", "Frame Stop", and "Data". Only if search criteria type "Data" is selected, individual search parameters can be specified in the tabs below the "Search criteria" dialog. For these parameters, see "ST"...
Page 815: Mdio Search Results
® Protocol analysis R&S MDIO (option R&S RTE-K55) Remote command: on page 1785 SEARch:TRIGger:MDIO:DATA 13.15.6.2 MDIO search results To get search results, "Enable" the search. You can minimize, shift or close the search dialog. The search results are listed in the search result table and marked in the waveform by blue lines.
Page 816: Usb (Option R&S Rte-K60)
447. 13.16 USB (option R&S RTE-K60) R&S RTE-K60 is a firmware option that enables the R&S RTE to analyze Universal Serial Bus (USB) protocols, by triggering and decoding them. The option is compatible with the standards USB 1.0, USB 1.1, USB 2.0 and USB HSIC (High-Speed Inter- Chip).
Page 817 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB (option R&S RTE-K60) Figure 13-92: USB Topology: mass storage device, printer, USB hub, and mouse (human interface device) connected to a USB host More information, including the USB specification, is available online within the web domain http://usb.org.
Page 818 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB (option R&S RTE-K60) ● Little Endian scheme: both multiple bits and multiple bytes are transmitted with the least significant bit/byte (LSB) sent first, while the most significant bit/byte (MSB) is sent last. ● HSIC (High-Speed Inter-Chip): an industry standard for USB chip-to-chip intercon- nection with a 2-signal (strobe, data) source synchronous serial interface, using 240 MHz DDR signaling to provide only high-speed (480 Mbps) data rate.
Page 819 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB (option R&S RTE-K60) Figure 13-95: Start of a high-speed packet: after an SE0, the packet starts with a SYNC field (or SOP), followed by the data packet SE0 = Single-ended zero, both D+ and D- wire are on low level...
Page 820 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB (option R&S RTE-K60) ● EOP (end of package): the devices determine the length of the data field with the EOP signal, which indicates the end of a packet. In low and full speed, it consists of two SE0 bits, followed by a J state.
Page 821: Usb 2.0 Configuration
PORT CRC5 Trigger possibilities Signals on the input channels CH1 - CH4 of the R&S RTE can be triggered by the option R&S RTE-K60. The following trigger types are available: ● ANY Packet - Packet Sync: Triggering on the first rising slope after transmission of the packet Sync.
Page 822 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB (option R&S RTE-K60) Figure 13-96: Serial bus protocol configuration dialog See also: Chapter 13.1.1, "Decode - general settings", on page 514. Protocol type Defines the USB protocol technology and transmission speed. "USB Low speed" Selects USB 2.0 low speed protocol (1.5 Mbit/s).
Page 823 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB (option R&S RTE-K60) "USB Full speed" Selects USB 2.0 full speed protocol (12 Mbit/s). Figure 13-98: USB full speed protocol configuration "USB High speed" Selects USB high-speed protocol (480 Mbit/s). As the signal is differ- ential, there is only one source and one threshold to be defined.
Page 824: Configuring Usb Signals
® Protocol analysis R&S USB (option R&S RTE-K60) D+, D- Define the source settings for the D+ and the D- data signals for USB low speed and USB full speed protocols. Usually, the source is one of the analog channels. Reference and math waveforms are available as source if the trigger source is one of the analog channels but not the serial bus.
Page 825: Usb 2.0 Trigger
® Protocol analysis R&S USB (option R&S RTE-K60) For details on configuration settings, see Chapter 13.16.2.1, "USB 2.0 configuration settings", on page 821. Serial Bus Setup 1. Press the [PROTOCOL] key on the front panel. 2. Select the tab of the bus you want to set up, for example "SB1".
Page 826 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB (option R&S RTE-K60) Figure 13-101: USB trigger event settings dialog Make sure that: ● In the [PROTOCOL] > "Decode" tab: – The correct "Protocol" is selected. – The data sources of the serial bus are channel signals.
Page 827 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB (option R&S RTE-K60) Only available for USB low speed and USB 2.0 full speed protocol types. Reset ← Trigger type USB Sets the trigger to the Reset field. For more information on the reset condition, see the USB standard.
Page 828 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB (option R&S RTE-K60) Handshake ← Trigger type USB Sets the trigger to one out of four different handshake trigger types: ACK, NAK, STALL, or NYET. "Handshake" on page 830 Special PID ← Trigger type USB Sets the trigger to one out of four different Special PID trigger types: PREamble, ERR, SPLIT, or PING.
Page 829 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB (option R&S RTE-K60) ● "End Point" on page 832 ● "Address" on page 832 SOF ← Token For the trigger token type "SOF", the following conditions can be set: You can refine the trigger condition: ●...
Page 830 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB (option R&S RTE-K60) ● "Payload" on page 833 Remote command: on page 1797 TRIGger<m>:USB:DATA Handshake Sets the trigger to one out of four different handshake types: ● "ACK" ● "NAK" ● "STALL" ● "NYET" If no handshake condition is set, the trigger instant is after the PID.
Page 831 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB (option R&S RTE-K60) "PID error " on page 832 SPLIT ← Special PID For the Trigger Special Type "SPLIT", the following conditions can be set: You can refine the trigger condition: ● "Address" on page 832 ●...
Page 832 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB (option R&S RTE-K60) ● "PID error " on page 832 Error condition Sets the trigger in case of one of the following eight different error condition types. The trigger instant is the first occurrence of the specified error.
Page 833 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB (option R&S RTE-K60) "Condition" Defining a specific address or an address range requires to set the operator to one of the following: equal, not equal, less than, less than or equal, greater than, greater than or equal, in range, out of range.
Page 834 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB (option R&S RTE-K60) on page 1800 TRIGger<m>:USB:FMIN on page 1800 TRIGger<m>:USB:FMAX SC check Defines, whether a Start / Complete SPLIT transaction check is executed or not. Remote command: on page 1806 TRIGger<m>:USB:WSTC on page 1803 TRIGger<m>:USB:STCO...
Page 835: Triggering On Usb 2.0
® Protocol analysis R&S USB (option R&S RTE-K60) Defines, whether an Endpoint Type (ET) check that meets specific conditions is execu- ted or not. "Condition" Defining a specific endpoint type or an ET range requires to set the operator to one of the following: equal, not equal, less than, less than or equal, greater than, greater than or equal, in range, out of range.
Page 836 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB (option R&S RTE-K60) For a description of the display settings, see also Chapter 13.1.3, "Display", on page 515. The instrument captures and decodes the signal according to the standard definition and the configuration settings. The color-coding of the various protocol sections and errors simplifies the interpretation of the visual display.
Page 837 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB (option R&S RTE-K60) since the remaining CRC16 cannot be computed. The trigger instant is on the CRC5 error. Figure 13-103: USB high-speed protocol: decoded and binary signal, and decode results green brackets [...] = start and end of packet...
Page 838 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB (option R&S RTE-K60) Figure 13-104: USB HSIC protocol: decoded and binary signal, and decode results green brackets [...] = start and end of packet blue packet = packet ok green packet = data packet ok...
Page 839: Search On Decoded Usb 2.0 Data
® Protocol analysis R&S USB (option R&S RTE-K60) For an introduction to zoom settings and setup, see: ● Chapter 7.1.2, "Zoom settings", on page 280 ● Chapter 7.1.3, "Zooming for details", on page 284 Data format You can select various data formats for the values displayed in the decode table and in the combs of the decoded signal.
Page 840 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB (option R&S RTE-K60) Individual search parameters (which do not depend on the USB protocol type and trig- ger settings), can be specified in the tabs below the "Search criteria" dialog. Remote command: on page 1821...
Page 841 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB (option R&S RTE-K60) You can refine the search condition: ● "Address check" on page 844 ● "End Point check" on page 844 For "SOF" tokens, the additional search parameter is "Frame number check". You can refine the search condition: ●...
Page 842 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB (option R&S RTE-K60) To search for payload in any data packet type, a data pattern and optionally a packet position have to be specified. You can refine the search condition: ● "Payload check" on page 845...
Page 843 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB (option R&S RTE-K60) You can refine the search condition: ● "Address check" on page 844 ● "End Point check" on page 844 Remote command: on page 1821 SEARch:TRIGger:USB:SPEC Error condition Searches for the following error conditions: "PID Error"...
Page 844 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB (option R&S RTE-K60) "Glitch Error" Searches for glitch errors (errors in the bit period, see USB standard for the definition of glitch). Remote command: on page 1817 SEARch:TRIGger:USB:GLITcherror Address check Enables the search for an address that meets specific conditions.
Page 845 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB (option R&S RTE-K60) Remote command: on page 1824 SEARch:TRIGger:USB:WFRN on page 1816 SEARch:TRIGger:USB:FCONdition on page 1817 SEARch:TRIGger:USB:FMIN on page 1817 SEARch:TRIGger:USB:FMAX Payload check Enables the search for a payload data pattern that meets specific conditions.
Page 846: Usb 2.0 Search Results
® Protocol analysis R&S USB (option R&S RTE-K60) SEU check Enables the search for an SEU that meets specific conditions. (For SEU, see "SEU" on page 834.) "Condition" Defining a specific SEU value or an SEU value range requires to set...
Page 847: Searching Usb Data
839. 5. To acquire a waveform, press [RUN N× SINGLE]. The R&S RTE performs a USB 2.0 decode according to the thresholds and proto- col settings of the associated serial bus source (here in our example SB1). 6. To start searching the acquired waveform for specific events, tap "Enable" in the search setup dialog.
Page 848: Usbpd (Option R&S Rte-K63)
USBPD (option R&S RTE-K63) 13.17 USBPD (option R&S RTE-K63) R&S RTE-K63 is a firmware option that enables the R&S RTE to analyze Universal Serial Bus Power Delivery (USBPD) signals. For analysis, USBPD encoded signals can be triggered, decoded and searched.
Page 849 ® Protocol analysis R&S USBPD (option R&S RTE-K63) Frame packet types All frame types are listed below. The frames listed above consist of individual sets of fields. Some frames only contain one field, others are much longer. The frame types are sorted according to the message type.
Page 850: Usbpd Configuration
® Protocol analysis R&S USBPD (option R&S RTE-K63) 13.17.2 USBPD configuration 13.17.2.1 USBPD configuration settings Access: [PROTOCOL] key > "Decode" tab > "Protocol" = "USBPD" Make sure that the tab of the correct serial bus is selected. See also: Chapter 13.1.1, "Decode - general settings",...
Page 851: Display Settings
® Protocol analysis R&S USBPD (option R&S RTE-K63) Hysteresis Sets a value for the hysteresis of the data. Remote command: on page 1832 BUS<m>:USBPd:HYSTeresis Current advertisment thresholds The signal level provides information about the current advertisement between the bursts. These thresholds determine the levels at which the current advertisement modes are defined.
Page 852: Configuring The Usbpd Signals
® Protocol analysis R&S USBPD (option R&S RTE-K63) Decode layer Selects the decode layer. Decoding is performed in several steps, and the end results are presented in the decode table. The decode layer selects an interim step for which the decoding result is shown in the honeycomb display.
Page 853: Usbpd Trigger
® Protocol analysis R&S USBPD (option R&S RTE-K63) 13.17.3 USBPD trigger If you need information on how to get started with triggering on USBPD signals, see Chapter 13.17.3.2, "Triggering on USBPD", on page 855. Otherwise proceed with the USBPD trigger settings.
Page 854 ® Protocol analysis R&S USBPD (option R&S RTE-K63) You can define individual checking parameters for the fields listed in the "Trigger type dependent settings". To specify these parameters, select a field from this list and define the data and/or index operators and values, or the bit state.
Page 855: Triggering On Usbpd
® Protocol analysis R&S USBPD (option R&S RTE-K63) Remote command: on page 1837 TRIGger<m>:USBPd:BIT on page 1837 TRIGger<m>:USBPd:FRAMe<n>:FLD<o>:BIT Index Defines for the selected field, how an index check is executed. "Condition" Defining a specific index or an index range requires to set the opera- tor to one of the following conditions: equal, in range.
Page 856 ® Protocol analysis R&S USBPD (option R&S RTE-K63) 2. In the "Protocol" dialog > "Display" tab, select additional result display settings: "Show decode table" and "Show binary signals". For a description of the display settings, see also Chapter 13.1.3, "Display", on page 515.
Page 857 ® Protocol analysis R&S USBPD (option R&S RTE-K63) Figure 13-106: USBPD protocol: decoded and binary signal, and decode results Table 13-25: Content of the "Decode results" table Column Description State Overall state of the frame Start Time of frame start...
Page 858 ® Protocol analysis R&S USBPD (option R&S RTE-K63) Column Description Numeric value The numeric value of the field Status Status of the field: OK or error Zooming on decoded results The zoom functions allow you to analyze the decode results in more detail. If "Zoom coupling"...
Page 859: Search On Decoded Usbpd Data
® Protocol analysis R&S USBPD (option R&S RTE-K63) ● on page 1842 BUS<m>:USBPd:RESult:FRAMe<n>:FLD<o>:TYPE? ● on page 1842 BUS<m>:USBPd:RESult:FRAMe<n>:FLD<o>:VAL? 13.17.5 Search on decoded USBPD data Using the search functionality, you can find various events in the decoded data. You can find the same events that you can trigger on, and even many more, since several event types can also be combined.
Page 860: Usbpd Search Results
® Protocol analysis R&S USBPD (option R&S RTE-K63) You can define individual search parameters for individual fields in the table below the "Search criteria" dialog. To specify these parameters, select a field in this table and define the data and/or index operators and values, or the bit state.
Page 861 ® Protocol analysis R&S USBPD (option R&S RTE-K63) Figure 13-107: Search on USBPD frame To get search results, "Enable" the search. You can minimize, shift or close the search dialog. The search results are listed in the search result table and marked in the waveform by blue lines.
Page 862: Searching Usbpd Data
859. 5. To acquire a waveform, press [RUN N× SINGLE]. The R&S RTE performs a USBPD decode according to the thresholds and protocol settings of the associated serial bus source (here in our example SB1). 6. To start searching the acquired waveform for specific events, tap "Enable" in the search setup dialog: The R&S RTE displays the "Search Results"...
Page 863: Spacewire (Option R&S Rte-K65)
Protocol analysis R&S SpaceWire (option R&S RTE-K65) 13.18 SpaceWire (option R&S RTE-K65) The SpaceWire is a communication network standard used for spacecrafts. It is based on the IEEE 1355 standard of comunications and coordinated by the European Space Agency (ESA).
Page 864: Spacewire Configuration
® Protocol analysis R&S SpaceWire (option R&S RTE-K65) ● Time Code consisting of an ESC followed by a single data character Figure 13-110: SpaceWire control codes 13.18.2 SpaceWire configuration 13.18.2.1 SpaceWire configuration settings Access: [PROTOCOL] > "Decode" tab > "Protocol = SpaceWire"...
Page 865 ® Protocol analysis R&S SpaceWire (option R&S RTE-K65) Strobe Selects the source for the strobe signal. Remote command: on page 1857 BUS<m>:SWIRe:STRBe:SOURce Data Selects the source for the data signal. Remote command: on page 1856 BUS<m>:SWIRe:DATA:SOURce Threshold setup Sets the threshold value for the strobe/data signal.
Page 866: Display Settings
® Protocol analysis R&S SpaceWire (option R&S RTE-K65) Min Gap SpaceWire can have idle phases where strobe and data signals are not being sent. These "gaps" are identified to resume decoding after this idle time. "Min Gap" sets the minimum duration of a gap. Any inactivity greater than this time is interpreted as a gap and lead to a resynchronization to the signal.
Page 867: Configuring The Spacewire Signals
® Protocol analysis R&S SpaceWire (option R&S RTE-K65) 13.18.2.3 Configuring the SpaceWire signals For configuration, assign the lines to the input channels and define the logical thresh- olds and the hysteresis. 1. Press the [PROTOCOL] key on the front panel.
Page 868 ® Protocol analysis R&S SpaceWire (option R&S RTE-K65) Make sure that: ● In the [PROTOCOL] > "Decode" tab: – The correct "Protocol" is selected. – The data sources of the serial bus are channel signals. ● In the "Trigger" > "Setup" tab: –...
Page 869 ® Protocol analysis R&S SpaceWire (option R&S RTE-K65) "Data pattern" Sets the trigger to a defined data pattern or pattern range. "NULL frame" Sets the trigger to a null frame, a frame without usable data. "Time Code" Sets the trigger to a time-code control code. You can define the data pattern of the time code to be triggered on.
Page 870: Triggering On Spacewire
® Protocol analysis R&S SpaceWire (option R&S RTE-K65) "Data Max" Sets the maximum value of a range for "Condition" = "In range"/"Out of range". Remote command: on page 1860 TRIGger<m>:SWIRe:TIME:CONDition on page 1861 TRIGger<m>:SWIRe:TIME:MAX on page 1861 TRIGger<m>:SWIRe:TIME:MIN Data(Data Pattern) Sets the specified data type for the data pattern to be triggered on.
Page 871: Spacewire Decode Results
® Protocol analysis R&S SpaceWire (option R&S RTE-K65) 6. To refine the trigger settings, configure additional settings, which are available for some trigger types. For details, see Chapter 13.18.3.1, "SpaceWire trigger settings", on page 867. 13.18.4 SpaceWire decode results When the configuration of the serial bus is complete, the signal can be decoded: 1.
Page 872 ® Protocol analysis R&S SpaceWire (option R&S RTE-K65) Figure 13-112: Decoded SpaceWire signal with a parity error Table 13-27: Content of the decode result table Column Description State Overall state of the frame Start Time of frame start in relation to the trigger point...
Page 873: Search On Decoded Spacewire Data
® Protocol analysis R&S SpaceWire (option R&S RTE-K65) Remote command: ● on page 1422 BUS<m>:FORMat Zooming on decoded results The zoom functions allow you to analyze the decode results in more detail. If "Zoom coupling" is enabled, the decode zoom and result table are synchronized; if you select a row in the result table, this result is shown in the decode zoom.
Page 874 ® Protocol analysis R&S SpaceWire (option R&S RTE-K65) Type Sets the search type for the SpaceWire analysis. "Control frame" Searches for the selected control type frame. "Data pattern" Searches for a defined data pattern or pattern range. "NULL frame" Searches for a null frame, a frame without usable data.
Page 875 ® Protocol analysis R&S SpaceWire (option R&S RTE-K65) "Time Code" Searches for a time-code control code. You can define the data pat- tern of the time code to be searched for. "ERRORs" Searches for an enabled error type. Remote command:...
Page 876: Spacewire Search Results
® Protocol analysis R&S SpaceWire (option R&S RTE-K65) "Data Min/ Defines the bit pattern of the data pattern. Data" In binary format, use the following characters: 1; 0; or X (do not care). To enter the pattern in other formats use the bit pattern editor, see Chapter 13.1.5, "Bit pattern...
Page 877: Searching Spacewire
873. 5. To acquire a waveform, press [RUN N× SINGLE]. The R&S RTE performs a SpaceWire decode according to the thresholds and pro- tocol settings of the associated serial bus source. 6. To start searching the acquired waveform for specific events, tap "Enable" in the search setup dialog: The R&S RTE displays the "Search Results"...
Page 878 ® Protocol analysis R&S CXPI (option R&S RTE-K76) ● Support of two methods for frame transfer management, the event trigger method and the polling method. The event trigger method can be used when the focus is placed on the responsive- ness of the slave node communication.
Page 879: Cxpi Configuration
® Protocol analysis R&S CXPI (option R&S RTE-K76) – Counter (CT): 2 bits indicating the continuity of the frame. – extension DLC: 1 byte that is added to the frame information for long frames. It indicates the length of the data byte field of a long frame.
Page 880 Alternatively, digital channels can be used if MSO option R&S RTE-B1 is installed. Dig- ital and analog channels cannot be used at the same time.
Page 881: Display Settings
® Protocol analysis R&S CXPI (option R&S RTE-K76) Enable bit rate/ Average bit rate If enabled, sets the number of transmitted bits per second. If disabled, the bit rate is measured and the average bit rate in the acquisition window is displayed.
Page 882: Cxpi Trigger
® Protocol analysis R&S CXPI (option R&S RTE-K76) 9. If necessary, enable and set the "Bit rate". 10. Enable "Decode". 13.19.3 CXPI trigger 13.19.3.1 CXPI trigger settings Access: [PROTOCOL] > "Trigger" tab > "Source = Serial Bus" User Manual 1326.1032.02 ─ 20...
Page 883 ® Protocol analysis R&S CXPI (option R&S RTE-K76) Make sure that: ● In the [PROTOCOL] > "Decode" tab: – The correct "Protocol" is selected. – The data sources of the serial bus are channel signals. ● In the "Trigger" > "Setup" tab: –...
Page 884 ® Protocol analysis R&S CXPI (option R&S RTE-K76) Normal Poll ← Trigger type Triggers on a normal poll frame. You can refine the trigger condition: ● Set a frame ID pattern or a frame ID range to trigger only on frames that fulfill these conditions.
Page 885 ® Protocol analysis R&S CXPI (option R&S RTE-K76) ● Set a data pattern condition to trigger only on frames that fulfill these conditions. See: "Data" on page 888. ● Set an index or index range to trigger only on frames that fulfill these conditions.
Page 886 ® Protocol analysis R&S CXPI (option R&S RTE-K76) See: "Frame ID" on page 887 ● Set an NM value expected in the frame. "NM" on page 889. ● Set a CT value expected in the frame. See: "CT" on page 889.
Page 887 ® Protocol analysis R&S CXPI (option R&S RTE-K76) Optionally, you can define a frame ID pattern or a frame ID range to trigger only on frames that fulfill these conditions. See:"Frame ID" on page 887. Error ← Trigger type Triggers if one or more of the following errors occur: ●...
Page 888 ® Protocol analysis R&S CXPI (option R&S RTE-K76) "Frame ID The second frame identifier pattern is required to specify a range with max" conditions "In range" and "Out of range". Remote command: on page 1883 TRIGger<m>:CXPI:FID:CONDition on page 1883 TRIGger<m>:CXPI:FID:MAX on page 1883 TRIGger<m>:CXPI:FID:MIN...
Page 889: Triggering On Cxpi
® Protocol analysis R&S CXPI (option R&S RTE-K76) "Data min / Defines the bit pattern of the data. Data" In binary format, use the following characters: 1; 0; or X (do not care). To enter the pattern in other formats use the bit pattern editor, see Chapter 13.1.5, "Bit pattern...
Page 890: Search On Decoded Cxpi Data
® Protocol analysis R&S CXPI (option R&S RTE-K76) 5. Tap "Trigger Type" and select the trigger type to be used for CXPI protocol analy- sis. 6. Depending on the selected trigger type, more setup conditions can be specified. For information on how to proceed with the configuration settings, see Chap- ter 13.19.3.1, "CXPI trigger...
Page 891 ® Protocol analysis R&S CXPI (option R&S RTE-K76) "Normal" Searches for a normal frame. You can refine the search condition, see: ● "Frame ID" on page 892 ● "NM" on page 893 ● "CT" on page 893 ● "DLC" on page 892 ●...
Page 892 ® Protocol analysis R&S CXPI (option R&S RTE-K76) Frame ID Searches for a frame identifier pattern or a frame identifier range. The setup consists of the condition and one or two frame patterns. The frame identifier setup settings are the same as in the CXPI trigger setup, see "Frame ID"...
Page 893: Search Results
® Protocol analysis R&S CXPI (option R&S RTE-K76) Remote command: on page 1890 SEARch:TRIGger:CXPI:DATA:ICONdition on page 1890 SEARch:TRIGger:CXPI:DATA:IMAX on page 1891 SEARch:TRIGger:CXPI:DATA:IMIN Searches for the value of the network management (NM), 2 bits indicating if the frame is in wakeup or sleep mode.
Page 894: Searching Cxpi Data
8. To start searching the acquired waveform for specific events, tap "Enable" in the search setup dialog: The R&S RTE displays the "Search Results" box that lists the detected events. For information on how to configure the search results presentation and how to navi- gate the search results, see also "To display search zoom windows"...
Page 895 ® Protocol analysis R&S CXPI (option R&S RTE-K76) 2. In the "Protocol" dialog > "Display" tab, select additional result display settings: "Show decode table" and "Show binary signals". For a description of the display settings, see also Chapter 13.1.3, "Display", on page 515.
Page 896 ® Protocol analysis R&S CXPI (option R&S RTE-K76) Enable "Show Details" in the decode table to display a more detailed analysis of the selected frame. Figure 13-117: Decoded CXPI signal result tables, normal polling frame with CRC error Table 13-29: Content of the "Decode results" table...
Page 897 ® Protocol analysis R&S CXPI (option R&S RTE-K76) Table 13-30: Content of the "Decode results details" table Column Description Type Type (name) of field Numeric value The numeric value of the field Status Status of the field: OK or error Zooming on decoded results The zoom functions allow you to analyze the decode results in more detail.
Page 898: Mixed Signal Option (Mso, R&S Rte-B1)
Digital channels and parallel buses 14 Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTE-B1) The Mixed Signal Option R&S RTE-B1 adds logic analyzer functions to the classical oscilloscope functions. Using the MSO option, you can analyze and debug embedded systems with mixed-signal designs that use analog signals and correlated digital sig- nals simultaneously.
Page 899: Parallel Buses - Configuration
® Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTE-B1) R&S Digital channels and parallel buses You can display each bus and use it as trigger source, as well. For each active parallel bus, the corresponding signal icon appears on the signal bar and indicates the assigned digital channels.
Page 900 ® Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTE-B1) R&S Digital channels and parallel buses If you have configured several parallel buses and you want to modify the settings, make sure that the tab of the correct bus is selected on the left side, and disable the bus before you change the settings.
Page 901 ® Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTE-B1) R&S Digital channels and parallel buses Show dig. signals If enabled, the selected digital channels are shown in the diagram. Each channel is dis- played as a logic signal. Remote command: on page 1908 BUS<m>:PARallel:DISPlay:SHDI...
Page 902 ® Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTE-B1) R&S Digital channels and parallel buses See also: "Bus representation" on page 901 Data format Sets the data format of bus values, which are displayed in the decode table and on the comb bus display. Available formats are: Hex, ASCII, octal, binary, signed, and unsigned.
Page 903 ® Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTE-B1) R&S Digital channels and parallel buses on page 1910 BUS<m>:PARallel:DECTable<n>:COUNt? on page 1910 BUS<m>:PARallel:DECTable<n>:DATA? Signal selection In the table, you select and configure the digital channels that are used in the selected bus.
Page 904: Parallel Buses - Digital Probes
® Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTE-B1) R&S Digital channels and parallel buses Threshold Hysteresis Logic 0 Logic 1 Logic 0 By default, same threshold and hysteresis value are used for all digital channels and all parallel buses: "Coupling" is enabled.
Page 905: Digital Resolution
® Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTE-B1) R&S Digital channels and parallel buses Logic probes provided by R&S are recognized by the instrument. The fields show the characteristics of each recognized probe (pod) for information. "Write EEPROM" and "Flash it" are service functions.
Page 906: Using Digital Probes
14.1.4 Using digital probes Ensuring accurate measurement results The mixed-signal-option (MSO, R&S RTE-B1) with connected probe leads is consid- ered as a test probe, according to EN 61326-2-1, clause 5.2.4.101. Therefore, the measurements are sensitive to electromagnetic interference. Consider additional shielding methods to avoid interference.
Page 907: Setting The Logical Thresholds
® Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTE-B1) R&S Display The digital signals are shown in the diagram, and the signal icon of the parallel bus appears on the signal bar. Using this bus icon, you can minimize, arrange, and switch off the bus together with its channels in the same way as you do with any waveform.
Page 908: Parallel Bus - Decode Table
® Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTE-B1) R&S Display You can also drag the bus waveforms on the display and scale them. ● Show the result box of the decoded clocked bus signal Each parallel bus is shown in a separate diagram, and the diagrams can be minimized and arranged as usual.
Page 909: Adjusting The Display Of Digital Channels And Parallel Buses
® Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTE-B1) R&S Trigger 14.2.2 Adjusting the display of digital channels and parallel buses The display of digital channels and parallel buses is flexible, you can adjust it to your needs by combining the following settings: 1.
Page 910: Trigger Settings For Digital Signals And Parallel Buses
® Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTE-B1) R&S Trigger For details, see: Chapter 14.3.1, "Trigger settings for digital signals and parallel buses", on page 910. Also, you can define trigger holdoff conditions. See Chapter 6.4, "Holdoff", on page 264. 14.3.1 Trigger settings for digital signals and parallel buses Depending on the selected source, the instrument provides the appropriate trigger types and the corresponding trigger settings.
Page 911: Edge
® Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTE-B1) R&S Trigger Type Depending on the selected source, the instrument provides the appropriate trigger types and the corresponding trigger settings. For mixed signal analysis, the following trigger types are available: ● Edge, see page 911 ●...
Page 912: Width
® Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTE-B1) R&S Trigger 14.3.1.3 Width The width trigger detects positive and/or negative pulses of a pulse width (duration) inside or outside of a defined time limit. It can trigger on a single digital channel or a logical combination of digital channels.
Page 913: Timeout
® Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTE-B1) R&S Trigger Width For the ranges "Shorter" and "Longer", the width defines the maximum and minimum pulse width, respectively. For the ranges "Within" and "Outside", the width defines the center of a range which is defined by the limits "±Delta".
Page 914: Data2Clock
® Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTE-B1) R&S Trigger Remote command: on page 1915 TRIGger<m>:PARallel:TIMeout:RANGe Time Defines the time limit for the timeout at which the instrument triggers. Remote command: on page 1916 TRIGger<m>:PARallel:TIMeout:TIME Logical expression Defines a logic combination of several digital channels as trigger condition if "Logic" is set for "Source".
Page 915: State
® Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTE-B1) R&S Trigger Remote command: on page 1913 TRIGger<m>:PARallel:DATatoclock:CSOurce[:VALue] on page 1913 TRIGger<m>:PARallel:STATe:CSOurce:VALue on page 1913 TRIGger<m>:PARallel:SPATtern:CSOurce[:VALue] Clock edge Sets the edge of the clock signal. The crossing of the clock edge and the logical threshold defines the time reference point for the setup and hold time measurement.
Page 916: Pattern
® Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTE-B1) R&S Trigger Figure 14-5: State trigger settings for trigger source = parallel bus Clock source Selects the digital channel of the clock signal. Remote command: on page 1913 TRIGger<m>:PARallel:DATatoclock:CSOurce[:VALue] on page 1913 TRIGger<m>:PARallel:STATe:CSOurce:VALue on page 1913 TRIGger<m>:PARallel:SPATtern:CSOurce[:VALue]...
Page 917 ® Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTE-B1) R&S Trigger ical expression, if "Logic" is used for trigger source. For a parallel bus trigger source, the pattern is defined by setting the state of each digital channel. The timing starts when the pattern comes true. The decision level is the logical thresh- old.
Page 918 ® Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTE-B1) R&S Trigger "Width" Sets a pulse width as timing condition, see "Width settings" on page 918. The pulse starts when the pattern comes true, and the trigger event occurs when the pattern comes false during the speci- fied time limit.
Page 919: Serial Pattern
® Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTE-B1) R&S Trigger For the ranges "Within" and "Outside", the width defines the center of a range which is defined by the limits "±Delta". Remote command: on page 1919 TRIGger<m>:PARallel:PATTern:WIDTh[:WIDTh] ±Delta ← Width settings Defines a range around the given width value.
Page 920: Triggering On Digital Signals And Parallel Buses
® Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTE-B1) R&S Trigger Logical expression Defines a logic combination of several digital channels as trigger condition if "Logic" is set for "Source". The "Qualification Editor" supports the entry of the expression. Remote command: on page 1913 TRIGger<m>:PARallel:TIMeout:EXPRession[:DEFine]...
Page 921: Measurements On Digital Channels
® Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTE-B1) R&S Data export 14.4 Measurements on digital channels For measurements on digital channels, the number of measurement categories and types is reduced to applicable measurement. These are: ● Period ● Frequency ● Positive and negative pulse ●...
Page 922: Mathematics
® Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTE-B1) R&S Mathematics If the data is written to XML or CSV files, the selected format is used. If the target file format is BIN, you can save signed and unsigned binary data. The data format "Signed"...
Page 923: Search
® Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTE-B1) R&S Search 14.7 Search Access: [Search] > "Setup" tab. It is also possible to search on digital channels for specified events. Search conditions use the same parameters as the trigger event definition, see Chapter 14.3.1, "Trigger...
Page 924: Waveform Generator (Option R&S Rte-B6)
Setup of the waveform generator 15 Waveform generator (Option R&S RTE-B6) The R&S RTE includes an integrated waveform generator which can generate input signals and patterns during testing. You can setup and output two waveform genera- tors and a pattern generator.
Page 925: General Settings
® Waveform generator (Option R&S RTE-B6) R&S Setup of the waveform generator Make sure that the tab of the correct waveform generator is selected on the left side. The settings of the waveform generators are not affected by an instrument preset.
Page 926: Function Generator
Message Displays relevant messages concerning the coupling and sync settings. 15.1.2 Function generator The R&S RTE function generator can generate input signals during testing. These sig- nals can be used, for example, when testing circuits. Function type Selects the type of waveform to be generated for the function generator.
Page 927 ® Waveform generator (Option R&S RTE-B6) R&S Setup of the waveform generator "Sine" Generates a sine wave. You can set its Frequency and Period. "Square" Generates a square wave. You can set its Frequency, Period Duty cycle. "Ramp" Generates a ramp signal. You can set its Frequency, Period Symmetry.
Page 928 ® Waveform generator (Option R&S RTE-B6) R&S Setup of the waveform generator "Pulse" Generates a pulse signal. You can set the Frequency, Period Pulse width. "Cardinal sine" Generates a cardinal sine wave. You can set the Frequency Period. "Cardiac" Generates a cardiac signal. You can set the Frequency and Period.
Page 929 ® Waveform generator (Option R&S RTE-B6) R&S Setup of the waveform generator "Lorentz" Generates a Lorentz signal . You can set the Frequency and Period. "Exp. rise" Generates an exponential rise signal. You can set the Frequency Period. "Exp. fall"...
Page 930: Modulation
® Waveform generator (Option R&S RTE-B6) R&S Setup of the waveform generator "Function type" Min frequency Max frequency "Cardiac" 0.001 Hz 1 MHz "Gauss" 0.001 Hz 25 MHz "Lorentz" 0.001 Hz 10 MHz "Exp.rise" 0.001 Hz 10 MHz "Ep. fall"...
Page 931: General Settings
® Waveform generator (Option R&S RTE-B6) R&S Setup of the waveform generator 15.1.3.1 General settings Consists of settings for selecting the modulation type. Modulation type Selects the modulation type, which defines how the carrier signal is modified. "AM" Amplitude modulation.
Page 932: Am Modulation
® R&S Waveform generator (Option R&S RTE-B6) Setup of the waveform generator Remote command: on page 1928 WGENerator<m>:MODulation:CARRier:PERiod 15.1.3.2 AM modulation For amplitude modulation (AM), the amplitude of the carrier signal is varied according to the modulation signal. Modulation signal Selects the type of the modulation signal for the AM modulation types.
Page 933: Pwm Modulation
® R&S Waveform generator (Option R&S RTE-B6) Setup of the waveform generator Symmetry Sets the symmetry for the ramp modulation waveform, the percentage of time that the waveform is rising. Remote command: on page 1927 WGENerator<m>:MODulation:AM:SYMMetry Duty cycle Sets the duty cycle for a square waveform. The duty cycle expresses for what percent- age fraction of the period, the waveform is active, i.e.
Page 934: Fm Modulation
® R&S Waveform generator (Option R&S RTE-B6) Setup of the waveform generator Remote command: on page 1931 WGENerator<m>:MODulation:PWM:FREQuency Modulation depth Sets the modulation depth, the percentage of the pulse width range that is used for the modulation. Remote command: on page 1931 WGENerator<m>:MODulation:PWM:DEPTh...
Page 935: Fsk Modulation
® Waveform generator (Option R&S RTE-B6) R&S Setup of the waveform generator Modulation signal Selects the type of the modulation signal for the FM modulation types. Remote command: on page 1929 WGENerator<m>:MODulation:FM[:FUNCtion] Modulation freq Sets the frequency of the modulation waveform.
Page 936: Sweep
Sets the hop rate, the frequency at which signal switches between Frequency 1 Frequency Remote command: on page 1930 WGENerator<m>:MODulation:FSK[:RATE] 15.1.4 Sweep In the sweep mode, the R&S RTE generates a signal whose frequency gradually changes from the Start frequency to the Stop freuqency for a certain Sweep time.
Page 937: Arbitrary
You can output a waveform from a file or from the current R&S RTE reference curve format. Files in *.csv and *.bin formats are supported. This files must follow a defined structure. You can load *.csv files in an R&S Wave Gen format (see Content and format of the R&S wave gen *.csv...
Page 938 ® Waveform generator (Option R&S RTE-B6) R&S Setup of the waveform generator Content and format of the R&S wave gen *.csv files The R&S waveform generator format can contain the following values: ● Rate ● Time value ● Voltage value...
Page 939: General Settings
® Waveform generator (Option R&S RTE-B6) R&S Setup of the waveform generator Content and format of the R&S arbitrary generator *.bin files The file stream should contain the following information in the given order: ● Sample rate [double format] ●...
Page 940: Saved Waveform
® Waveform generator (Option R&S RTE-B6) R&S Setup of the waveform generator Remote command: on page 1935 WGENerator<m>:ARBGen:SRATe Samples Displays the number of samples in the loaded waveform. Remote command: on page 1935 WGENerator<m>:ARBGen:SAMPles? 15.1.5.2 Saved waveform For a saved waveform, the following settings are available: Load arbitrary waveform Opens a file selection dialog box and loads the selected file.
Page 941: Scope Waveform
® Waveform generator (Option R&S RTE-B6) R&S Setup of the waveform generator Remote command: on page 1933 WGENerator<m>:ARBGen:MULTichannel:NAME on page 1933 WGENerator<m>:ARBGen:MULTichannel:IMPort on page 1934 WGENerator<m>:ARBGen:MULTichannel:OPEN 15.1.5.3 Scope waveform For a scope waveform, the following settings are available: Signal source Selects the oscilloscope source, from which the arbitrary signal is loaded.
Page 942: Noise
® Waveform generator (Option R&S RTE-B6) R&S Setup of the waveform generator Remote command: on page 1938 WGENerator<m>:VOLTage:HIGH Sets the low signal level of the output waveform. Remote command: on page 1939 WGENerator<m>:VOLTage:LOW Inversion Inverts the waveform at the offset level.
Page 943: Setup Of The Pattern Generator
® Waveform generator (Option R&S RTE-B6) R&S Setup of the pattern generator Remote command: on page 1939 WGENerator<m>:MODulation:NDCLevel 15.2 Setup of the pattern generator Access: [Gen 1]/[Gen 2] > "PG" tab The pattern generator outputs parallel patterns. User Manual 1326.1032.02 ─ 20...
Page 944 ® Waveform generator (Option R&S RTE-B6) R&S Setup of the pattern generator Using pattern generator accessories The pattern generator with connected Patt Gen Cable and Patt Gen Board (1329.7054.02) is considered as a test probe, EN 61326-2-1, clause 5.2.4.101, note 1.
Page 945: Content And Format Of The Pattern Generator Files
® Waveform generator (Option R&S RTE-B6) R&S Setup of the pattern generator The settings of the pattern generator are not affected by an instrument preset. Press "Preset Patt Gen" to preset the settings of the pattern generator. 15.2.1 Content and format of the pattern generator files The pattern generator supports .bin or .csv file formats.
Page 946: Pattern Generator Settings
® Waveform generator (Option R&S RTE-B6) R&S Setup of the pattern generator Content and format of the R&S pattern generator *.bin files For the content of the fields, refer to "Content and format of the R&S*.csv files" on page 945.
Page 947: Coupling And Sync Settings
15.3 Coupling and Sync settings Access: [Gen 1]/[Gen 2] > "Coupling & Sync" tab. In the R&S RTE, you can couple certain settings of the available waveform generators. If one of the available coupling options is enabled for one of the generators, then you cannot change the coupled parameters at the "Setup"...
Page 948: Configuring The Waveform Generator
® Waveform generator (Option R&S RTE-B6) R&S Configuring the waveform generator Remote command: on page 1942 WGENerator<m>:COUPling:OUTPut Couple all frequency parameters Couples all frequency parameters of "Gen1" to "Gen2" or "Gen2" to "Gen1". The val- ues are taken from the currently selected generator.
Page 949: Configuring A Function Waveform
® Waveform generator (Option R&S RTE-B6) R&S Configuring the waveform generator ● Configuring a function waveform................949 ● Configuring a modulation waveform..............949 ● Configuring a sweep waveform................951 ● Configuring an arbitrary waveform................ 951 ● Configuring a pattern generator waveform............952 15.4.1 Configuring a function waveform 1.
Page 950 ® Waveform generator (Option R&S RTE-B6) R&S Configuring the waveform generator 3. Under "Operation mode", enable the "Modulation" button. 4. Tap "Modulation type" and select "PWM". 5. Set the "Carrier frequency" and the "Carrier period". 6. Tap "Modulation signal" and select the required waveform.
Page 951: Configuring A Sweep Waveform
® Waveform generator (Option R&S RTE-B6) R&S Configuring the waveform generator 15.4.3 Configuring a sweep waveform 1. Press the [Gen 1] key on the front panel. 2. Select the "Setup" tab. 3. Under "Operation mode", enable the "Sweep" button. 4. Set the "Start frequency", the "Stop frequency" and the "Sweep time".
Page 952: Configuring A Pattern Generator Waveform
® Waveform generator (Option R&S RTE-B6) R&S DC offset alignment 9. Press the "Enable" button, to output the waveform at the output connector of the waveform generator. 15.4.5 Configuring a pattern generator waveform 1. Press the [Gen 1] key on the front panel.
Page 953 ® Waveform generator (Option R&S RTE-B6) R&S DC offset alignment Time Displays the time of the last performed DC offset alignment. Remote command: on page 1941 GENerator:ALIGnment:DC:RESult:TIME? Overall alignment state Displays the result of the DC offset alignment. Remote command:...
Page 954: Power Analysis (Option R&S Rte-K31)
® Power analysis (option R&S RTE-K31) R&S Power measurement selection 16 Power analysis (option R&S RTE-K31) With the R&S RTE and option R&S RTE-K31, you can perform power analysis mea- surements. The following power measurements are available: ● Power quality ●...
Page 955: General Settings
® Power analysis (option R&S RTE-K31) R&S Power measurement selection 16.1.1 General settings Access: "Analysis"> "Power" > "General Settings" The General settings, can be used by all measurements, like deskewing. 16.1.1.1 Auto deskew The "Auto Deskew" dialog box guides you through the auto deskew of your current and voltage probes.
Page 956: Probes
® Power analysis (option R&S RTE-K31) R&S Power measurement selection 9. Set the "Overwrite present skew setup" on page 957 and "Activate user defined preset" on page 958 options. These settings define whether the instrument uses the deskew result for user-defined preset and general skew settings.
Page 957: Settings
® Power analysis (option R&S RTE-K31) R&S Power measurement selection Settings In this tab, you can define the preset behavior and how the auto deskew results are stored. Current channel skew Shows the skew settings of the channel connected to the current probe. Skew settings are defined in the "Horizontal >...
Page 958: Dut
® Power analysis (option R&S RTE-K31) R&S Power measurement selection Activate user defined preset If enabled, the deskew values are written to a user-defined preset file, and the user- defined preset is enabled. Thus, the probe setup and deskew values are not influenced by a manual [PRESET].
Page 959: Report
® Power analysis (option R&S RTE-K31) R&S Power measurement selection Site Enter a site. Remote command: on page 1947 POWer:REPort:SITE Temperature Enter the temperature. Remote command: on page 1947 POWer:REPort:TEMPerature Description Enter a description. Remote command: on page 1947 POWer:REPort:DESCription 16.1.1.3...
Page 960 ® Power analysis (option R&S RTE-K31) R&S Power measurement selection Report Table Shows a list of the available measurements. After you select a Directory, you can manage previous report results from this direc- tory. To add a measurement report press "Insert" or "Append". To remove a measure- ment report press "Remove".
Page 961: Layout
® Power analysis (option R&S RTE-K31) R&S Power measurement selection Directory Selects the directory, from which previous report results are inserted into the report table. You can use this directory to insert previously recorded report data into the cur- rent report.
Page 962 ® Power analysis (option R&S RTE-K31) R&S Power measurement selection Paper size Selects the paper size. "A4" Selects A4. "US Letter" Selects US Letter. Remote command: on page 1947 POWer:REPort:PAPersize Font Sets the font for the report Family ← Font Selects the font family.
Page 963: Content
® Power analysis (option R&S RTE-K31) R&S Power measurement selection Remote command: on page 1947 POWer:REPort:FONT:COLO Invert Screenshot Colors Inverts the screenshot colors. Remote command: on page 1949 POWer:REPort:INVert Logo File Selects a path to a logo picture file. Remote command:...
Page 964: Overview Of Power Measurement Setup
® Power analysis (option R&S RTE-K31) R&S Overview of power measurement setup Measurement Setup Adds a graphic of the measurement setup. Remote command: on page 1946 POWer:REPort:CONTent:MSETup Settings Adds the settings of the analysis. Remote command: on page 1946 POWer:REPort:CONTent:SETTings Vertical Setup Adds the vertical setup settings.
Page 965: Channels Tab
® Power analysis (option R&S RTE-K31) R&S Overview of power measurement setup 16.2.1 Channels tab In the "Channels" tab, you find information on the experimental setup of the selected power measurement. A short description explains what probes are needed and how to connect them.
Page 966: Details Tab
® Power analysis (option R&S RTE-K31) R&S Overview of power measurement setup For detailed information, see the "Settings" chapter of the relevant power measure- ment description. 16.2.3 Details tab In the "Details" tab, you find information on the measurement resources used by the selected power measurement.
Page 967: Input
® Power analysis (option R&S RTE-K31) R&S Input ● Cursors ● XY-diagrams The instrument enables the required resources when the power measurement is star- ted. 16.3 Input The "Input" measurements are for performing input line analysis. They are used to measure the characteristics of the input power and the effects the power supply exudes to the input line.
Page 968 ® Power analysis (option R&S RTE-K31) R&S Input To measure and display the power quality, the instrument uses the following measure- ments and waveforms: ● "Meas 6" to measure the voltage ● "Meas 7" to measure the current ● "Meas 8" to measure the power ●...
Page 969 ® Power analysis (option R&S RTE-K31) R&S Input Figure 16-1: Power diagram for sinusoidal signals P = real power [W] Q = reactive power [VAR] S = complex power [VA] φ = phase angle between the current and the voltage sine waves [°]...
Page 970: Configuring Power Quality
® Power analysis (option R&S RTE-K31) R&S Input ● on page 1952 POWer:QUALity:RESult:POWer:PHASe? ● on page 1952 POWer:QUALity:RESult:POWer:REACtive? ● on page 1952 POWer:QUALity:RESult:POWer:REALpower? ● on page 1952 POWer:QUALity:RESult:VOLTage:CREStfactor? ● on page 1952 POWer:QUALity:RESult:VOLTage:FREQuency? ● on page 1952 POWer:QUALity:RESult:VOLTage:PEAK? ● on page 1952 POWer:QUALity:RESult:VOLTage:RMS? ●...
Page 971: Power Quality Settings
® Power analysis (option R&S RTE-K31) R&S Input 10. Tap "Execute". On the screen you can see the measurement waveforms of the current, the voltage and the power. Also, the result box with numeric measurement results is shown. For details, see Chapter 16.3.1.1, "Power quality...
Page 972: Inrush Current
® Power analysis (option R&S RTE-K31) R&S Input Remote command: on page 1951 POWer:QUALity:AUTO Report comment In this field you can write a comment that is displayed in the measurement report, for example, a measurement description. Execute Starts the " Power Quality" measurement.
Page 973: Configuring Inrush Current
® Power analysis (option R&S RTE-K31) R&S Input 16.3.2.2 Configuring inrush current For details of the configuration settings, see Chapter 16.3.2, "Inrush current", on page 972. 1. Select "Analysis" > "Power". 2. Under "Input", select "Inrush Current". 3. Connect the current probe to the oscilloscope.
Page 974: Inrush Current Settings
® Power analysis (option R&S RTE-K31) R&S Input 16.3.2.3 Inrush current settings In the "Channels" tab, you set the current source, see also: Chapter 16.2.1, "Channels tab", on page 965. In the "Settings" tab, you configure the inrush current measurement parameters and display settings.
Page 975: Current Harmonic
® Power analysis (option R&S RTE-K31) R&S Input Remote command: on page 1953 POWer:INRush:ADD on page 1953 POWer:INRush:INSert on page 1953 POWer:INRush:REMove Inrush current ← Gate Configuration Shows the index of the gate. Remote command: on page 1953 POWer:INRush:COUNt? Start time ← Gate Configuration Sets the start measuring time for the selected gate.
Page 976 ® Power analysis (option R&S RTE-K31) R&S Input – the voltage waveform – the current waveform – the power waveform ● The result box displays a bar chart or a table with the numerical measurement results up to the 40th harmonics.
Page 977: Configuring Current Harmonic
® Power analysis (option R&S RTE-K31) R&S Input Result Table Bar Chart Match Description Value Value of the Y-Axis. Shown The present value of the current harmonic by a green bar Maximum Shown by a darkened green The maximum measured value...
Page 978: Current Harmonic Settings
® Power analysis (option R&S RTE-K31) R&S Input 6. Select the correct channels for the "Current Source" and the "Voltage Source". 7. Select the "Settings" tab. 8. Set the "Standard in use" 9. Set the "Frequency" according to your signal.
Page 979 ® Power analysis (option R&S RTE-K31) R&S Input Standard in use Select the standard in use. For a list of the available standards, see Table 16-1. Table 16-1: Current Harmonic pre-compliance standards Standard Application EN 61000-3-2 Class A Balanced 3-phase equipment, household appliances...
Page 980: Control Loop
® Power analysis (option R&S RTE-K31) R&S Control loop Revised Current Available only for "Standard" > "RTCA DO-160". Selects how the results are evaluated. Available are the following settings: ● Evaluation with current source only ● Evaluation with voltage source and revised current law –...
Page 981: Modulation Analysis Results
® Power analysis (option R&S RTE-K31) R&S Control loop 16.4.1.1 Modulation analysis results The results of "Modulation Analysis " measurements are provided in two ways: ● The diagram shows the graphical presentation of: – the voltage or the current waveform –...
Page 982: Configuring Modulation Analysis
® Power analysis (option R&S RTE-K31) R&S Control loop ● on page 1958 POWer:MODulation:RESult:NPEak? ● on page 1958 POWer:MODulation:RESult:PPEak? ● on page 1958 POWer:MODulation:RESult:RMS? ● on page 1958 POWer:MODulation:RESult:STDDev? ● on page 1958 POWer:MODulation:RESult:WFMCount? ● on page 1958 POWer:MODulation:REPort:ADD 16.4.1.2...
Page 983: Modulation Analysis Settings
® Power analysis (option R&S RTE-K31) R&S Control loop 16.4.1.3 Modulation analysis settings In the "Channels" tab, you set the current source and the voltage source, see also: Chapter 16.2.1, "Channels tab", on page 965. In the "Settings" tab, you configure the modulation analysis parameters and display settings.
Page 984: Dynamic On Resistance
® Power analysis (option R&S RTE-K31) R&S Control loop "Autoscale the signals" Automatically selects the most appropriate scale for the display of the results. "Keep present settings" The present display settings are not changed. Remote command: on page 1958 POWer:MODulation:AUTO...
Page 985: Configuring Dynamic On Resistance
® Power analysis (option R&S RTE-K31) R&S Control loop ● "Meas 7" to measure the amplitude of the current ● "Meas 8" to measure the amplitude of the current ● "C 1 " Cursor 1 to measure gate ["t " ,"t "]...
Page 986: Dynamic On Resistance Settings
® Power analysis (option R&S RTE-K31) R&S Control loop 6. Select the correct channels for the "Current Source" and the "Voltage Source". 7. Select the "Settings" tab. 8. If "Average" is selected, enter the "Average count", that is the number of wave- forms used for average calculation.
Page 987 ® Power analysis (option R&S RTE-K31) R&S Control loop Average Enables the "Average" method for building the resulting waveform. The average is cal- culated from the data of the current acquisition and several acquisitions before. The method reduces random noise and other heterodyne signals. It requires a stable, trig- gered and periodic signal for correct function.
Page 988: Slew Rate
® Power analysis (option R&S RTE-K31) R&S Control loop "Autoscale the signals" Automatically selects the most appropriate scale for the display of the results. "Keep present settings" The present display settings are not changed. Remote command: on page 1959 POWer:DONRes:AUTO...
Page 989: Configuring Slew Rate
® Power analysis (option R&S RTE-K31) R&S Control loop ● "M2" Math 4 to calculate the time derivative of the current or voltage waveform ● "C 1" Cursor 1 to determine the measurement area The used resources are listed in the "Details" tab. See also: Chapter 16.2.3, "Details...
Page 990: Slew Rate Settings
® Power analysis (option R&S RTE-K31) R&S Control loop 6. Select the correct channels for the "Current Source" and the "Voltage Source". 7. Select the "Settings" tab. 8. Select the "Source". 9. If "Average" is selected, enter the "Average count", that is the number of wave- forms used for average calculation.
Page 991 ® Power analysis (option R&S RTE-K31) R&S Control loop Average Enables the "Average" method for building the resulting waveform. The average is cal- culated from the data of the current acquisition and several acquisitions before. The method reduces random noise and other heterodyne signals. It requires a stable, trig- gered and periodic signal for correct function.
Page 992: Power Path
® Power analysis (option R&S RTE-K31) R&S Power path Remote command: on page 1961 POWer:SLEWrate:EXECute 16.5 Power path The "Power Path" measurements are used for analyzing the behavior of the devices that control the power flow through the switched-mode power supply (SMPS) circuit, including switching devices and inductors.
Page 993 ® Power analysis (option R&S RTE-K31) R&S Power path To measure and display the safe operating area, the instrument uses the following measurements and diagrams: ● "XY1" XY Diagram 1 to measure the logarithmic waveform ● "XY2" XY Diagram 2 to measure the linear waveform ●...
Page 994: Configuring Safe Operating Area
® Power analysis (option R&S RTE-K31) R&S Power path 16.5.1.2 Configuring safe operating area For details of the configuration settings, see Chapter 16.5.1.3, "Safe operating area settings", on page 995. 1. Select "Analysis" > "Power". 2. Under "Power Path", select "Safe Operating Area".
Page 995: Safe Operating Area Settings
® Power analysis (option R&S RTE-K31) R&S Power path 16.5.1.3 Safe operating area settings In the "Channels" tab, you set the current source and the voltage source, see also: Chapter 16.2.1, "Channels tab", on page 965. In the "Settings" tab, you configure the safe operating area parameters and display set- tings.
Page 996: Turn On/Off
® Power analysis (option R&S RTE-K31) R&S Power path on page 1964 POWer:SOA:LINear:INSert on page 1964 POWer:SOA:LOGarithmic:INSert on page 1964 POWer:SOA:LINear:REMove on page 1964 POWer:SOA:LOGarithmic:REMove Volt ← SOA point definition Sets the voltage value of the SOA point. Remote command: on page 1964 POWer:SOA:LINear:POINt<m>:VOLTage...
Page 997: Configuring Turn On/ Off
® Power analysis (option R&S RTE-K31) R&S Power path The used resources are listed in the "Details" tab. See also: Chapter 16.2.3, "Details tab", on page 966. The" Turn on time" is measured as the time between the trigger point ("Trigger level on"...
Page 998: Turn On/Off Settings
® Power analysis (option R&S RTE-K31) R&S Power path 4. Select the correct channels for the "DC output" and the "AC input" or the "DC input". 5. Select the "Settings" tab. 6. Select whether you want to measure "Turn on" or "Turn off".
Page 999 ® Power analysis (option R&S RTE-K31) R&S Power path Figure 16-3: Settings turn off time Input Type To access this setting, select the "Channels" tab. Selects the AC or DC input type. Remote command: on page 1966 POWer:ONOFf:INPut Measurement Type Selects the"Turn on"...
Page 1000: Switching Loss
® Power analysis (option R&S RTE-K31) R&S Power path Steady state level- Turn off ← Turn off Sets the percentage of the steady state level of the DC output that has to be reached. Remote command: on page 1966 POWer:ONOFf:DSOFf Trigger level ←...

This manual is also suitable for:

Rte1022 Rte1024 Rte1032 Rte1034 Rte1052 Rte1054 ... Show all

Rohde & Schwarz RTE User Manual

Table of Contents

● Saving Data 103 3.3.1 Displaying a Basic Signal

Setup: Luminosity Settings

Time Scale/Acquisition Time

Ground

Shared Probe Settings

Basic Trigger Settings

Quick Links

Chapters

Need help?

Questions and answers

Related Manuals for Rohde & Schwarz RTE

Summary of Contents for Rohde & Schwarz RTE